Note: Descriptions are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
DISPLAY CONSTRUCT AND FRAMING FOR MEDIA PROJECTION
PRIORITY APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims priority from U.S. Provisional
Patent Application No.
63/246,770, filed September 21, 2021, titled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA
PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING," U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial
No.
63/212,483, filed June 18, 2021, titled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA
PROJECTION
AND WIRELESS CHARGING," U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
63/170,245,
filed April 2, 2021, titled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND
WIRELESS CHARGING," U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/154,352,
filed
February 26, 2021, titled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND
WIRELESS CHARGING," U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/115,842,
filed
November 19, 2020, titled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION," U.S.
Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/211,400, filed June 16, 2021,
titled "DISPLAY
CONSTRUCT AND FRAMING FOR MEDIA PROJECTION," U.S. Provisional Patent
Application Serial No. 63/135,021, filed January 8, 2021, titled
"CONFIGURATION OF
MEDIA DISPLAY IN A FACILITY," and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial
No.
63/247,684 filed September 23, 2021, titled "CONFIGURATION ASSOCIATED WITH
MEDIA DISPLAY IN A FACILITY." This application also claims priority from U.S.
Provisional
Patent Application Serial No. 63/115,842, filed November 19, 2020, titled
"DISPLAY
CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION," and from U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial No. 63/154,352, filed February 26, 2021, titled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR
MEDIA
PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING." This application claims priority as a
Continuation-In-Part from International Patent Application Serial No.
PCT/US20/53641, filed
September 30, 2020, titled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY," which
claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
62/911,271, filed October
5, 2019, titled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY," from U.S.
Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/952,207, filed December 20, 2019,
titled
"TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY," from U.S. Provisional Patent
Application Serial No. 62/975,706, filed February 12, 2020, titled "TANDEM
VISION
WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY," from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
63/085,254, filed September 30, 2020, titled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA
DISPLAY." International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a
Continuation-in-Part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 16/950,774, filed
November 17,
2020, titled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS," which is a Continuation-in-Part
of U.S.
Patent Application Serial No. 16/608,157, filed October 24, 2019, titled
"DISPLAYS FOR
TINTABLE WINDOWS," which is a National Stage Entry of International Patent
Application
Serial No. PCT/US18/29476, filed April 25, 2018, titled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE
WINDOWS," which claims priority from (i) U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial No.
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
62/607,618, filed December 19, 2017, titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH
TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY FIELD," (ii) U.S. Provisional Patent
Application
Serial No. 62/523,606, filed June 22, 2017, titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS
WITH
TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY," (iii) U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial
No. 62/507,704, filed May 17, 2017, titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH
TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY," (iv) U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial
No. 62/506,514, filed May 15, 2017, titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH
TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY," and (v) U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial No. 62/490,457, filed April 26, 2017, titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS
WITH
TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY." International Patent Application Serial No.
PCT/US20/53641 is also a Continuation-In-Part of U.S. Patent Application
Serial No.
17/083,128, filed October 28, 2020, titled "BUILDING NETWORK," which is a
Continuation
of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 16/664,089, filed October 25, 2019,
titled "BUILDING
NETWORK," that is a National Stage Entry of International Patent Application
Serial No.
PCT/US19/30467, filed May, 2, 2019, titled "EDGE NETWORK FOR BUILDING
SERVICES," which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial No.
62/666,033, filed May 02, 2018, U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 17/083,128,
is also a
Continuation-In-Part of International Patent Application Serial No.
PCT/US18/29460, filed
April 25, 2018 titled "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM FOR BUILDING SERVICES," which
claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
62/607,618, U.S. to U.S.
Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/523,606, from U.S. Provisional
Patent
Application Serial No. 62/507,704, from U.S. Provisional Patent Application
Serial No.
62/506,514, and from U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
62/490,457.
International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a
Continuation-In-Part of
U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 17/081,809, filed October 27, 2020, titled
"TINTABLE
WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM," which is a Continuation of U.S. Patent
Application Serial No. 16/608,159, filed October 24, 2019, titled "TINTABLE
WINDOW
SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM," that is a National Stage Entry of International
Patent
Application Serial No. PCT/US18/29406, filed April, 25, 2018, titled "TINTABLE
WINDOW
SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM," which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent
Application Serial No. 62/607,618, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial
No.
62/523,606, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/507,704, U.S.
Provisional
Patent Application Serial No. 62/506,514, and U.S. Provisional Patent
Application Serial No.
62/490,457. This application also claims priority as a Continuation-in-Part
from U.S. Patent
Application Serial No. 17/338,562, filed June 3, 2021, titled "DISPLAYS FOR
TINTABLE
WINDOWS," which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
16/950,774, filed
November 17, 2020, titled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS". Each of the above
recited patent documents is entirely incorporated herein by reference.
2
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
BACKGROUND
[0002] Various facilities (e.g., buildings) have windows
installed, e.g., in their facades. The
windows provide a way to view an environment external to the facility. In some
facilities, the
window may take a substantial portion of a facility facade. Users may request
utilization of
the window surface area to view various media (e.g., for entertainment
purposes, to process
data, and/or to conduct a video conference). At times, a user may want to
optimize usage of
interior space to visualize the media (e.g., by using the window surface). The
media may be
electronic media and/or optical media. A user may request viewing the media
with minimal
impact on visibility through the window. The media may be displayed via a
display that is at
least partially transparent. At times viewing the media may require a tinted
(e.g., darker)
backdrop. At times, the user may want to shade its interior surrounding. At
times, the lifetime
of the media display, (e.g., an OLED display) may be damaged overtime, e.g.,
by Ultra-
Violet (UV) irradiation, heat, and atmosphere constituents. Such harm may
reduce prolonged
use of the media display. At times a user may want to augment external view
with overlays,
augmented reality, and/or lighting. In certain settings, it may be beneficial
to have an
architectural element that facilitates (e.g., simultaneous) viewing of two
(e.g., identical or
different) media displayed at opposite sides of the architectural element
(e.g., structure), and
view through the architectural element (e.g., when the media is not displayed
and/or when
the media is displayed). In certain configurations, it may be beneficial to
move the display
construct (e.g., in real time during its operation, and/or when the display
construct is not
operational). The present inventions offer a solution to this and other
problems.
SUMMARY
[0003] In an aspect disclosed herein is a display construct that
is coupled with a window
(e.g., a viewing window such as a tintable window). The viewing window may or
may not
include an integrated glass unit. The display construct may include one or
more glass panes.
The display may comprise at least one display matrix. The display matrix may
comprise a
light emitting diode (LED), e.g., that is at least partially transparent
(e.g., a TOLED display
construct). The display may comprise liquid crystal display (LCD).
[0004] In an aspect disclosed herein is a display construct that
comprises an intermediate
supportive structure and at least one pair of display matrices that display
media at opposite
sides of the supportive structure that supports the at least one pair of
display matrices. The
supportive structure and display matrices may be at least partially
transparent to visible light.
The display construct may be installed in a framing that couples to a railing,
thus facilitating
its (e.g., lateral) mobility. The framing may be configured to accommodate one
or more
circuit boards that facilitate the display of the media on the display
matrices.
[0005] In another aspect disclosed herein is a strengthening
application to any lamination
defect, e.g., in the rim of the display construct.
3
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0006] In another aspect, a device for aligning media displays of
a matrix of media
displays, the device comprises: a retaining clip configured to (i) be mounted
to a first media
display and to a second media display, (ii) facilitate alignment of the first
media display and
of the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane,
(iii) retain, or
substantially retain, relative positions of the first media display and of the
second media
display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display
and with the
second media display, and (iv) be disposed adjacent to a first end of the
first media display
and to a second end of the second media display, wherein the first media
display is disposed
immediately adjacent to the second media display in the matrix of media
displays.
[0007] In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to
retain, or substantially
retain, relative positions of the first media display, of the second media
display, and of a
supportive structure to which the first media display and the second media
display are
coupled to, during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media
display and with the
second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configure to
be removably
mounted to the first media display and to the second media display. In some
embodiments,
the first media display is immediately adjacent to the second media display
without having
any other media display disposed therebetween. In some embodiments, the
retaining clip is
configured to be removably mounted to the first media display and to the
second media
display at least in part by being configured to engage and disengage with the
first media
display and with the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining
clip is
configured to be removably mounted (a) to the first media display through a
first framing of
the first media display, and (b) to the second media display through a second
framing of the
second media display. In some embodiments, the first media display is coupled
to a side of a
supportive panel on a first side of the first media display opposing the first
end, wherein the
second media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel on a
second side of the
second media display opposing the second end. In some embodiments, the first
media
display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel with a first hinge,
wherein the second
media display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel with a second
hinge. In some
embodiments, the first hinge facilitates swiveling of the first media display
with respect to the
supportive panel about a first hinge joint, and wherein the second hinge
facilitates swiveling
of the second media display with respect to the supportive panel about a
second hinge joint.
In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to hinder (e.g.,
prevent) swiveling of
the first media display and the second media display when the retaining clip
is mounted to
the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the
first media
display is coupled to the side of the supportive panel through a framing of
the supportive
panel, wherein the second media display is coupled to the side of the
supportive panel
through the framing of the supportive panel. In some embodiments, the
supportive panel
comprises a window. In some embodiments, the window is a tintable window. In
some
4
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
embodiments, the tintable window and the media displays are configured to be
controlled by
a control system. In some embodiments, at least one of the media displays is
configured to
communicatively couple to one or more controllers configured to control a
display of (e.g.,
electronic and/or digital) media on the at least one of the media displays,
which one or more
controllers are included in the control system. In some embodiments, at least
one of the
media displays is configured to communicatively couple to a first controller
of the control
system, and wherein the tintable window is configured to communicatively
couple to a
second controller of the control system. In some embodiments, at least one of
the media
displays is configured to communicatively couple to a first controller of the
control system,
which first controller is disposed in a window frame housing of the tintable
window. In some
embodiments, the control system is a hierarchical control system. In some
embodiments, the
control system (i) comprises a distributed network of controllers, (ii) is
configured to control
different devices of the facility other than the device, (iii) is configured
to control messaging
relating to the facility, and/or (iv) is configured to control the facility.
In some embodiments,
the control system is configured to control the facility at least in part by
being configured to
control (I) an environment of the facility, (II) a building management system
of the facility,
and/or (III) presence of personnel in the facility. In some embodiments,
messaging relating
the facility include educational, entertainment, safety, health, work,
greetings, scheduling,
and/or otherwise informative messaging. In some embodiments, the different
devices
comprise one or more sensors, one or more emitters, one or more transceiver,
or one or
more tintable windows. In some embodiments, the one or more sensors comprise
an
environmental sensor. In some embodiments, the one or more sensors comprise a
temperature sensor, volatile organic compound (VOC) sensor, particulate matter
sensor, gas
sensor, pressure sensor, accelerometer, sound sensor, or an electromagnetic
sensor. In
some embodiments, the one or more emitters comprise lighting, heater, cooler,
ventilator,
speaker, chemical emitter, heating cooling and ventilation (HVAC) system, or
media display.
In some embodiments, the one or more transceivers comprise a radio, or an
antenna. In
some embodiments, the antenna comprises a radar, a distributed antenna system
(DAS), or
a small cell. In some embodiments, the antenna is configured for cellular
communication of
at least a third (3G), fourth (4G), or fifth (5G) generation cellular
communication protocol. In
some embodiments, the one or more tintable windows comprise an electrochromic
window.
In some embodiments, the tintable window and the media displays are
operatively coupled
to a network. In some embodiments, the network is configured to
communicatively couple to
a building management system. In some embodiments, the network is configured
to facilitate
adjustment of an environment of a facility. In some embodiments, the tintable
window and
the media displays are configured to receive power from the network. In some
embodiments,
a portion of the network is contained in a facility and a second portion of
the network is
located remote from the facility. In some embodiments, at least a portion of
the network is
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
disposed in an envelope of an enclosure of the facility, wherein the enclosure
optionally
comprises a building. In some embodiments, the network comprises a fist
network installed
in the facility. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit
communication
and power on a single cable. In some embodiments, the network is configured to
transmit
different types of communication on a single cable. In some embodiments, the
different
types of communication comprise a control signal, a cellular signal, sensor
data, video,
pictures, sound, or another data type. In some embodiments, the other data
type comprises
digital or electronic data. In some embodiments, the cellular signal conforms
to at least a
third (3G), fourth (4G), or fifth (5G) generation cellular communication
protocol. In some
embodiments, the control signal conforms to a Building Automation and Control
(BAC)
protocol. In some embodiments, the network is configured to operatively couple
to at least
one controller. In some embodiments, the network is configure to operatively
couple to (i)
one or more controllers optionally forming a control system, (ii) different
devices of the facility
other than the device, (iii) communicate messaging relating to the facility,
and/or (iv) is
configured to facilitate control the facility. In some embodiments, the first
media display
includes a first pin extending therefrom, the second media display includes a
second pin
extending therefrom, and the retaining clip is configured to engage with the
first pins and
with the second pin, to facilitate (i) the alignment of the first media
display and the second
media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or (ii)
retain, or substantially
retain, the relative positions of the first media display and the second media
display over
time and/or during operation. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is
configured to couple
to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first arm extending in a
first direction across a
window and secured to a window framing system, (ii) a second arm extending in
a second
direction, generally normal to the first direction, which second arm extends
across the media
display matrix and is configured to secure the media display to the window
framing system,
and (iii) a joint securing the first arm to the second arm and removably
securing the retaining
clip to the interior framing portion that is disposed between the first media
display and the
second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip comprises (i) a
first leg
configured to align the first media display with the second media in the same
plane or in the
substantially same plane, wherein the first media display is coupled to the
first leg on a first
side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the second
media display is
coupled to the first leg on a second side of the second media display opposing
the second
end, and (ii) a second leg extending from the joint generally normal from the
first leg and
configured to facilitate mounting of the retaining clip. In some embodiments,
the second leg
is configured to allow minimal movement, or prevent movement, of the first
media display
relative to the second media display upon engagement. In some embodiments, the
interior
framing portion includes a semi-permeable material (a) between the first arm
and (i) the first
media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and
second media displays,
6
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
and/or (b) between the second arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the
second media
display or (iii) both the first and second media displays. In some
embodiments, the semi-
permeable material comprises a thickness to fill a gap between the first arm
and the first
media display, the first arm and the second media display, the second arm and
the first
media display and/or the second arm and the second media display. In some
embodiments,
the semi-permeable material is configured to compress to maintain the first
media display
and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane. In
some
embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises foam. In some embodiments,
the
semi-permeable material is configured to allow for air flow through the semi-
permeable
material. In some embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to engage and
cradle upon
engagement: a first pin of the first media display and a second pin of the
second media
display. In some embodiments, the first pin is configured to protrude from a
first framing of
the first media display and/or wherein the second pin is configured to
protrude from a second
framing of the second media display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip
is configured
to (i) be mounted to the first media display, to the second media display, to
a third media
display, and to a fourth media display, (ii) facilitate alignment of the first
media display, the
second media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display in
the same, or
substantially the same, plane, (iii) retain, or substantially retain, relative
positions of the first
media display, the second media display, the third media display, and the
fourth media
display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display,
the second
media display, the third media display, and the fourth media display, and (iv)
be disposed
adjacent to the first end of the first media display, to the second end of the
second media
display, to a third end of the third media display and to a fourth end of the
fourth media
display, wherein the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to
the second
media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the third media display
that is
disposed immediately adjacent to the fourth media display that is disposed
immediately
adjacent to the first media display, in the matrix of media displays. In some
embodiments,
the retaining clip comprises (i) a first leg extending from a retaining clip
center, which first leg
is configured to align the first media display with the second media in the
same plane or in
the substantially same plane, wherein the first media display is coupled to
the first leg on a
first side of the first media display opposing the first end, wherein the
second media display
is coupled to the first leg on a second side of the second media display
opposing the second
end, (ii) a second leg extending from the retaining clip center in a lateral
direction opposite to
that of the first leg, which second leg is configured to align the third media
display with the
fourth media in the same plane or in the substantially same plane, wherein the
third media
display is coupled to the second leg on a third side of the third media
display opposing a
third end of the third media display, wherein the fourth media display is
coupled to the
second leg on a fourth side of the fourth media display opposing a fourth end
of the fourth
7
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
media display, and (iii) a third leg extending generally normal from the first
leg and the
second leg, which third leg is configured to facilitating mounting of the
retaining clip. In some
embodiments, the first leg is configured to allow minimal movement, or prevent
movement,
of the first media display relative to the second media display upon
engagement, and/or
wherein the second leg is configured to allow minimal movement, or prevent
movement, of
the third media display relative to the fourth media display upon engagement.
In some
embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to engage and cradle upon
engagement: a first
pin of the first media display, a second pin of the second media display, a
third pin of the
third media display, and a fourth pin of the fourth media display. In some
embodiments, (i)
the first pin is configured to protrude from a first framing of the first
media display, (ii) the
second pin is configured to protrude from a second framing of the second media
display, (iii)
the third pin is configured to protrude from a third framing of the third
media display, and/or
(iv) the fourth pin is configured to protrude from a fourth framing of the
fourth media display.
In some embodiments, the first arm is generally C-shaped. In some embodiments,
the first
leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, the first arm and the second
arm are each
generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the first leg comprises a curvature
and/or the
second leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, the joint includes a
boss, which
boss is configured to operatively engage the retaining clip to removably
secure the retaining
clip to the joint. In some embodiments, the retaining clip includes a fastener
extending
therethrough, which fastener selectively secures the retaining clip to the
joint. In some
embodiments, the interior framing portion includes a stiffener flange
extending from the boss
along at least a portion of the joint. In some embodiments, each of the first
media display
and the second media display includes a pin extending therefrom, and the
retaining clip
selectively operatively engages the pins to facilitate the alignment of the
first media display
and the second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane,
and retain, or
substantially retain, the relative positions of the first media display and
the second media
display. In some embodiments, the retaining clip includes a fastener extending
therethrough,
which fastener selectively secures the retaining clip to a window framing
system. In some
embodiments, the retaining clip is configured to couple to an interior framing
portion that
includes (i) a first arm that extends across a window and is secured to a
window framing
system, wherein the first arm comprises a curvature with upstanding flanges,
and (ii) a semi-
permeable material configured to mount between the first arm and the first
media display,
the second media display or both the first and second media displays. In some
embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises a thickness to fill a gap
between the
first arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display, or
(iii) both the first
media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the semi-
permeable
material is configured to compress to maintain the first media display and the
second media
display in the same, or substantially the same, plane. In some embodiments,
the semi-
8
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
permeable material comprises foam. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable
material is
mounted between the upstanding flanges. In some embodiments, the semi-
permeable
material is configured to allow for air flow through the semi-permeable
material. In some
embodiments, wherein the interior framing portion includes a boss, which boss
operatively
engages retaining clip to removably secure the retaining clip to the window
framing system.
[0008] In another aspect, a method for aligning media displays of
a media display matrix,
the method comprises: mounting and/or using the retaining clip with media
display(s) of the
media display matrix of any of the devices disclosed above.
[0009] In another aspect, a method for aligning media displays of
a media display matrix,
the method comprises: using any of the retaining clip(s), e.g., to align media
display(s) of the
media display matrix of any of the devices disclosed above.
[0010] In another aspect, a method for aligning media displays of
a media display matrix,
the method comprises: mounting a retaining clip with a first media display and
with a second
media display, which mounting facilitates (i) aligning of the first media
display and the
second media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane, (ii)
retaining, or
substantially retaining, relative positions of the first media display and of
the second media
display during engagement of the retaining clip with the first media display
and with the
second media display, which retaining clip is mounted such that it is disposed
adjacent to a
first end of the first media display and to a second end of the second media
display, wherein
the first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media
display in the
matrix of media displays.
[0011] In some embodiments, the method further comprises engaging
the retaining clip
with the first media display and with the second media display such that the
retaining clip
retains, or substantially retains, relative positions of the first media
display, of the second
media display, and of a supportive structure to which the first media display
and the second
media display are coupled to. In some embodiments, the method further
comprises placing
the first media display immediately adjacent to the second media display
without having any
other media display disposed therebetween. In some embodiments, the method
further
comprises removably mounting the retaining clip to the first media display and
to the second
media display at least in part by engaging and disengaging with the first
media display and
with the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further
comprises
removably mounting the retaining clip (a) to the first media display through a
first framing of
the first media display, and (b) to the second media display through a second
framing of the
second media display. In some embodiments, the method further comprises
coupling the
first media display to a side of a supportive panel on a first side of the
first media display
opposing the first end, and coupling the second media display to the side of
the supportive
panel on a second side of the second media display opposing the second end. In
some
embodiments, the method further comprises coupling the first media display to
the side of
9
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
the supportive panel with a first hinge, and coupling the second media display
to the side of
the supportive panel with a second hinge. In some embodiments, the method
further
comprises coupling the first media display to the side of the supportive panel
through a
framing of the supportive channel, and coupling the second media display to
the side of the
supportive panel through the framing of the supportive panel. In some
embodiments, the
supportive panel comprises a window. In some embodiments, the supportive panel
comprises a tintable window. In some embodiments, the tintable window and the
media
display are controlled by a control system. In some embodiments, the tintable
window and
the media display are operatively coupled to a network. In some embodiments,
the method
further comprises extending a first pin from the first media display,
extending a second pin
from the second media display, and engaging the retaining clip with the first
pin and the
second pin to facilitate (i) aligning the first media display and the second
media display in the
same, or substantially the same, plane, and/or (ii) retaining, or
substantially retaining,
relative positions of the first media display and the second media display
over time and/or
during operation. In some embodiments, the method further comprises including
coupling
the retaining clip to an interior framing portion that includes (i) a first
arm extending in a first
direction across a window and secured to a window framing system, (ii) a
second arm
extending in a second direction, generally normal to the first direction,
which second arm
extends across the media display matrix and is configured to secure the media
display to the
window framing system, and (iii) a joint securing the first arm to the second
arm and
removably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portion that is
disposed between
the first media display and the second media display. In some embodiments, the
method
further comprises (i) aligning the first media display with the second media
display in the
same, or substantially the same, plane by operatively engaging a first leg of
the retaining clip
to a first side of the first media display opposing the first end and a second
side of the
second media display opposing the second end, and (ii) mounting the retaining
clip to the
joint by operatively engaging a second leg, generally extending normal to the
first leg, to the
joint. In some embodiments, the method further comprises including, upon
operatively
engaging the second leg, allowing minimal movement, or preventing movement, of
the first
media display relative to the second media display. In some embodiments, the
method
further comprises disposing a semi-permeable material (a) between the first
arm and (i) the
first media display, (ii) the second media display or (iii) both the first and
second media
displays, and/or (b) between the second arm and (i) the first media display,
(ii) the second
media display or (iii) both the first and second media displays. In some
embodiments, the
method further comprises filing a gap between (i) the first arm and the first
media display, (ii)
the first arm and the second media display, (iii) the second arm and the first
media display
and/or (iv) the second arm and the second media display, with the semi-
permeable material.
In some embodiments, the method further comprises compressing the semi-
permeable
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
material to maintain the first media display and the second media display in
the same, or
substantially the same, plane. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable
material
comprises foam. In some embodiments, the method further comprises flowing air
through
the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the method further comprises
upon
engaging the retaining clip, engaging and cradling a first pin of the first
media display and a
second pin of the second media display. In some embodiments, the method
further
comprises protruding the first pin from a first framing of the first media
display and/or
protruding the second pin from a second framing of the second media display.
In some
embodiments, the method further comprises the retaining clip (i) mounting to
the first media
display, to the second media display, to a third media display, and to a
fourth media display,
(ii) facilitating alignment of the first media display, the second media
display, the third media
display and the further media display in the same, or substantially the same,
plane, (iii)
retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the first media
display, the second
media display, the third media display and the fourth media display during
engagement of
retaining clip with the first media display, the second media display, the
third media display
and the further media display, and (iv) being disposed adjacent to the first
end of the first
media display, to the second end of the second media display, to a third end
of the third
media display and to a fourth end of the fourth media display, wherein the
first media display
is disposed immediately adjacent to the second media display that is disposed
immediately
adjacent to the third media display that is disposed immediately adjacent to
the fourth media
display that is disposed immediately adjacent to the first media display, in
the matrix of
media displays. In some embodiments, the retaining clip comprises a first leg
extending from
a retaining clip center, a second leg extending from the retaining clip center
in a lateral
direction opposite to that of the first leg and a third leg extending
generally normal from the
first leg, the method further comprising (i) aligning the first media display
with the second
media display in the same, or substantially the same, plane by coupling the
first media
display to the first leg on a first side of the first media display opposing
the first end and
coupling the second media display to the first leg on a second side of the
second media
display opposing the second end, (ii) aligning the third media display with
the fourth media
display in the same, or substantially the same, plane by coupling the third
media display to
the second leg on a third side of the third media display opposing a third end
of the third
media display and coupling the fourth media display to the second leg of a
fourth side of the
fourth media display opposing a fourth end of the fourth media display, and
(iii) facilitating
mounting the retaining clip with the third leg. In some embodiments, the
method further
comprises allowing minimal movement, or preventing movement, of the first
media display
relative to the second media display upon engagement of the first leg, and/or
allowing
minimal movement, or preventing movement, of the third media display relative
to the fourth
media display upon engagement of the second leg. In some embodiments, the
method
11
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
further comprises engaging and cradling a first pin of the first media
display, a second pin of
the second media display, a third pin of the third media display and a fourth
pin of the fourth
media display, upon engagement of the retaining clip. In some embodiments, the
method
further comprises including (i) protruding the first pin from a first framing
of the first media
display, (ii) protruding the second pin from a second framing of the second
media display,
(iii) protruding the third pin from a third framing of the third media
display, and/or (iv)
protruding the fourth pin from a fourth framing of the fourth media display.
In some
embodiments, the first arm is generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the
first leg
comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, the first arm and the second arm
are each
generally C-shaped. In some embodiments, the first leg comprises a curvature
and/or the
second leg comprises a curvature. In some embodiments, operatively engaging
the retaining
clip to a boss of the joint, removably securing the retaining clip to the
joint. In some
embodiments, the method further comprises extending a fastener through the
retaining clip
and selectively secure the retaining clip to the joint. In some embodiments,
the interior
framing portion includes a stiffener flange extending from the boss along at
least a portion of
the joint. In some embodiments, the method further comprises extending a first
pin from the
first media display and extending a second pin from the second media display,
operatively
engaging the first pin and the second pin with the retaining clip,
facilitating alignment of the
first media display and the second media display in the same, or substantially
the same,
plane, and retaining, or substantially retaining, the relative positions of
the first media display
and the second media display. In some embodiments, the method further
comprises
extending a fastener through the retaining clip and selectively securing the
retaining clip to a
window framing system with the fastener. In some embodiments, the method
further
comprises (i) coupling the retaining clip to an interior framing portion that
includes a first arm
that extends across a window and is secured to a window framing system,
wherein the first
arm comprising a curvature with upstanding flanges, and (ii) disposing a semi-
permeable
material between the first arm and the first media display, the second media
display or both
the first and second media displays. In some embodiments, filling a gap
between the first
arm and (i) the first media display, (ii) the second media display, or (iii)
both the first media
display and the second media display, with the semi-permeable material. In
some
embodiments, the method further comprises compressing the semi-permeable
material to
maintain the first media display and the second media display in the same, or
substantially
the same, plane. In some embodiments, the semi-permeable material comprises
foam. In
some embodiments, the method further comprises mounting the semi-permeable
material
between the upstanding flanges. In some embodiments, the method further
comprises
flowing air through the semi-permeable material. In some embodiments, the
method further
comprises including operatively engaging the retaining clip with a boss that
is a portion of the
interior framing portion to removably secure the retaining clip to the window
framing system.
12
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0012] In some embodiments, the network is a local network. In some
embodiments, the
network comprises a cable configured to transmit power and communication in a
single cable.
The communication can be one or more types of communication. The communication
can
comprise cellular communication abiding by at least a second generation (2G),
third
generation (3G), fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) cellular
communication
protocol. In some embodiments, the communication comprises media communication
facilitating stills, music, or moving picture streams (e.g., movies or
videos). In some
embodiments, the communication comprises data communication (e.g., sensor
data). In some
embodiments, the communication comprises control communication, e.g., to
control the one
or more nodes operatively coupled to the networks. In some embodiments, the
network
comprises a first (e.g., cabling) network installed in the facility. In some
embodiments, the
network comprises a (e.g., cabling) network installed in an envelope of the
facility (e.g., in an
envelope of a building included in the facility).
[0013]
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides systems, apparatuses
(e.g.,
controllers), and/or non-transitory computer-readable medium or media (e.g.,
software) that
implement any of the methods disclosed herein.
[0014]
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides methods that use any of
the
systems, computer readable media, and/or apparatuses disclosed herein, e.g.,
for their
intended purpose.
[0015]
In another aspect, an apparatus comprises at least one controller that is
programmed to direct a mechanism used to implement (e.g., effectuate) any of
the method
disclosed herein, which at least one controller is configured to operatively
couple to the
mechanism. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the method)
are
directed/executed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at less at two
operations are
directed/executed by different controllers.
[0016]
In another aspect, an apparatus comprises at least one controller that is
configured
(e.g., programmed) to implement (e.g., effectuate) any of the methods
disclosed herein. The
at least one controller may implement any of the methods disclosed herein. In
some
embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the method) are
directed/executed by the same
controller. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are
directed/executed by different
controllers.
[0017]
In some embodiments, one controller of the at least one controller is
configured to
perform two or more operations. In some embodiments, two different controllers
of the at least
one controller are configured to each perform a different operation.
[0018]
In another aspect, a system comprises at least one controller that is
programmed to
direct operation of at least one another apparatus (or component thereof), and
the apparatus
(or component thereof), wherein the at least one controller is operatively
coupled to the
apparatus (or to the component thereof). The apparatus (or component thereof)
may include
13
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
any apparatus (or component thereof) disclosed herein. The at least one
controller may be
configured to direct any apparatus (or component thereof) disclosed herein.
The at least one
controller may be configured to operatively couple to any apparatus (or
component thereof)
disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the
apparatus) are
directed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at less at two
operations are directed
by different controllers.
[0019]
In another aspect, a computer software product (e.g., inscribed on one or
more non-
transitory medium) in which program instructions are stored, which
instructions, when read by
at least one processor (e.g., computer), cause the at least one processor to
direct a
mechanism disclosed herein to implement (e.g., effectuate) any of the method
disclosed
herein, wherein the at least one processor is configured to operatively couple
to the
mechanism. The mechanism can comprise any apparatus (or any component thereof)
disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the
apparatus) are
directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at less at two
operations
are directed/executed by different processors.
[0020]
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory
computer-
readable program instructions (e.g., included in a program product comprising
one or more
non-transitory medium) comprising machine-executable code that, upon execution
by one or
more processors, implements any of the methods disclosed herein. In some
embodiments, at
least two operations (e.g., of the method) are directed/executed by the same
processor. In
some embodiments, at less at two operations are directed/executed by different
processors.
[0021]
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory
computer-
readable medium or media comprising machine-executable code that, upon
execution by one
or more processors, effectuates directions of the controller(s) (e.g., as
disclosed herein). In
some embodiments, at least two operations (e.g., of the controller) are
directed/executed by
the same processor. In some embodiments, at less at two operations are
directed/executed
by different processors.
[0022] In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a computer system
comprising
one or more computer processors and a non-transitory computer-readable medium
or media
coupled thereto. The non-transitory computer-readable medium comprises machine-
executable code that, upon execution by the one or more processors, implements
any of the
methods disclosed herein and/or effectuates directions of the controller(s)
disclosed herein.
[0023]
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory
computer
readable program instructions that, when read by one or more processors,
causes the one or
more processors to execute any operation of the methods disclosed herein, any
operation
performed (or configured to be performed) by the apparatuses disclosed herein,
and/or any
operation directed (or configured to be directed) by the apparatuses disclosed
herein.
14
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0024]
In some embodiments, the program instructions are inscribed in a non-
transitory
computer readable medium or media. In some embodiments, at least two of the
operations
are executed by one of the one or more processors. In some embodiments, at
least two of the
operations are each executed by different processors of the one or more
processors.
[0025]
In another aspect, the present disclosure provides networks that are
configured for
transmission of any communication (e.g., signal) and/or (e.g., electrical)
power facilitating any
of the operations disclosed herein. The communication may comprise control
communication,
cellular communication, media communication, and/or data communication. The
data
communication may comprise sensor data communication and/or processed data
communication. The networks may be configured to abide by one or more
protocols facilitating
such communication. For example, a communications protocol used by the network
(e.g., with
a BMS) can be a building automation and control networks protocol (BACnet).
For example,
a communication protocol may facilitate cellular communication abiding by at
least a 2nd, 3rd,
4th, or 5th generation cellular communication protocol.
[0026] The content of this summary section is provided as a simplified
introduction to the
disclosure and is not intended to be used to limit the scope of any invention
disclosed herein
or the scope of the appended claims.
[0027] Additional aspects and advantages of the present disclosure will become
readily
apparent to those skilled in this art from the following detailed description,
wherein only
illustrative embodiments of the present disclosure are shown and described. As
will be
realized, the present disclosure is capable of other and different
embodiments, and its several
details are capable of modifications in various obvious respects, all without
departing from the
disclosure. Accordingly, the drawings and description are to be regarded as
illustrative in
nature, and not as restrictive.
[0028] These and other features and embodiments will be described in more
detail with
reference to the drawings.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
[0029]
All publications, patents, and patent applications mentioned in this
specification are
herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual
publication, patent,
or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be
incorporated by
reference.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0030] The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in
the appended
claims. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present
invention will
be obtained by reference to the following detailed description that sets forth
illustrative
embodiments, in which the principles of the invention are utilized, and the
accompanying
drawings or figures (also "Fig." and "Figs." herein), of which:
[0031] Figs. 1A-1B show various windows and display constructs;
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0032] Fig. 2 schematically shows a display construct assembly;
[0033] Fig. 3 schematically shows a display construct assembly;
[0034] Fig. 4 schematically shows a hinge;
[0035] Fig. 5 schematically shows various fasteners and display construct
assemblies;
[0036] Fig. 6 schematically various fasteners, display construct
assemblies, and wiring;
[0037] Fig. 7 schematically shows various fasteners and display construct
assemblies;
[0038] Fig. 8 schematically shows various views of a display construct
assembly and
applicator;
[0039] Fig. 9 schematically shows various views of a display construct
assembly;
[0040] Fig. 10 schematically shows various fasteners options and
display construct
assemblies;
[0041] Fig. 11 schematically various operations in display
construct assembly formation;
[0042] Fig. 12 schematically shows various fasteners and display construct
assemblies;
[0043] Fig. 13 schematically shows various layers in an
electrochromic construct;
[0044] Figs. 14A-B schematically show various views of integrated glass units;
[0045] Fig. 15 schematically shows a control hierarchy scheme and a building;
[0046] Fig. 16 schematically shows a processing system;
[0047] Fig. 17 schematically shows a display construct assembly and a
controller and
power supply assembly;
[0048] Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of an operating method for a
display
construct;
[0049] Fig. 19 s a flow chart showing an example of an operating method for a
display
construct;
[0050] Fig. 20 schematically shows a control scheme for display constructs;
[0051] Figs. 21A-B schematically show various windows and display constructs;
[0052] Figs. 22A-B schematically show various windows and display constructs;
[0053] Fig. 23 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;
[0054] Fig. 24 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;
[0055] Fig. 25 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;
[0056] Fig. 26 schematically shows a disassembled (e.g., exploded) view of a
box
comprising circuitry;
[0057] Figs. 27A-B schematically show various views of a box comprising
circuitry;
[0058] Fig. 28 schematically shows a display construct and associated
components;
[0059] Figs. 29A-D schematically show various display constructs;
[0060] Figs. 30A-B schematically show various display constructs;
[0061] Figs. 31A-B schematically show various display constructs;
[0062] Fig. 32 schematically shows a disassembled (e.g., exploded view) of a
box
comprising circuitry;
16
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0063] Figs. 33A-D schematically show various views of a box comprising
circuitry;
[0064] Figs. 34A-E schematically show various views of a box comprising
circuitry;
[0065] Fig. 35 schematically show various views of a display constructs and
associated
components (e.g., portions thereof).;
[0066] Fig. 36 schematically show various views of a display constructs and
associated
components (e.g., portions thereof);
[0067] Fig. 37 schematically show various views of a display constructs and
associated
components (e.g., portions thereof);
[0068] Fig. 38 schematically show various views of a display constructs and
associated
components (e.g., portions thereof);
[0069] Fig. 39 schematically show various views of a display constructs and
associated
components (e.g., portions thereof);
[0070] Fig. 40 schematically show various views of portions of a display
constructs and
associated components (e.g., portions thereof);
[0071] Fig. 41 schematically show various views of a display constructs and
associated
components (e.g., portions thereof);
[0072] Fig. 42 schematically show various views of portion of a display
constructs and
associated components;
[0073] Fig. 43 schematically show various views of portions of a fastener and
associated
components;
[0074] Fig. 44 schematically shows various windows and display constructs;
[0075] Fig. 45 schematically shows perspective views of internal framing
portions and a
retaining clip;
[0076] Fig. 46 schematically shows a perspective view of internal framing
portions and a
retaining clip;
[0077] Fig. 47 schematically shows perspective views of a pin and a media
display
portion;
[0078] Fig. 48 schematically shows perspective views of a portion of media
displays,
internal framing portions and a retaining clip;
[0079] Fig. 49 schematically shows perspective views of internal
framing portions;
[0080] Fig. 50 schematically shows a perspective view of a portion of a media
display,
internal framing portions and a retaining clip;
[0081] Fig. 51 is a flow chart;
[0082] Fig. 52 is a flow chart;
[0083] Figs. 53A and 53B schematically show a perspective view of a portion of
a media
display, internal framing portions and a retaining clip;
[0084] Figs. 54A-B schematically show various perspective views of media
display
portions, internal framing portions and retaining clips; and
17
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0085] Figs. 55A-B shows various portions of a display construct and
associated
components.
[0086] The figures and components therein may not be drawn to scale. Various
components of the figures described herein may not be drawn to scale.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0087] While various embodiments of the invention have been shown, and
described
herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments
are provided by
way of example only. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions may occur
to those
skilled in the art without departing from the invention. It should be
understood that various
alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein might be
employed.
[0088] Terms such as "a," "an," and "the" are not intended to
refer to only a singular entity
but include the general class of which a specific example may be used for
illustration. The
terminology herein is used to describe specific embodiments of the
invention(s), but their
usage does not delimit the invention(s).
[0089] When ranges are mentioned, the ranges are meant to be inclusive, unless
otherwise specified. For example, a range between value 1 and value 2 is meant
to be
inclusive and include value 1 and value 2. The inclusive range will span any
value from
about value 1 to about value 2. The term "adjacent" or "adjacent to," as used
herein, includes
"next to," "adjoining," "in contact with," and "in proximity to."
[0090] The term "operatively coupled" or "operatively connected" refers to a
first element
(e.g., mechanism) that is coupled (e.g., connected) to a second element, to
allow the
intended operation of the second and/or first element. The coupling may
comprise physical
or non-physical coupling. The non-physical coupling may comprise signal-
induced coupling
(e.g., wireless coupling). Coupled can include physical coupling (e.g.,
physically connected),
or non-physical coupling (e.g., via wireless communication).
[0091] An element (e.g., mechanism) that is "configured to" perform a function
includes a
structural feature that causes the element to perform this function. A
structural feature may
include an electrical feature, such as a circuitry or a circuit element. A
structural feature may
include a circuitry (e.g., comprising electrical or optical circuitry).
Electrical circuitry may
comprise one or more wires. Optical circuitry may comprise at least one
optical element
(e.g., beam splitter, mirror, lens and/or optical fiber). A structural feature
may include a
mechanical feature. A mechanical feature may comprise a latch, a spring, a
closure, a hinge,
a chassis, a support, a fastener, or a cantilever, and so forth. Performing
the function may
comprise utilizing a logical feature. A logical feature may include
programming instructions.
Programming instructions may be executable by at least one processor.
Programming
instructions may be stored or encoded on a (e.g., non-transitory) medium
accessible by one
or more processors. Additionally, in the following description, the phrases
"operable to,"
18
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
"adapted to," "configured to," "designed to," "programmed to," or "capable of"
may be used
interchangeably where appropriate.
[0092] As used herein, including the claims, the conjunction "and/or" in a
phrase such as
"including X, Y, and/or Z", refers to in inclusion of any combination or
plurality of X, Y, and Z.
For example, such phrase is meant to include X. For example, such phrase is
meant to include
Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include Z. For example, such phrase is
meant to
include X and Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and Z. For
example, such
phrase is meant to include Y and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to
include a plurality
of Xs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys. For
example, such
phrase is meant to include a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is
meant to include a
plurality of Xs and a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to
include a plurality
of Xs and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a
plurality of Ys and
a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of
Xs and Y. For
example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Z. For example,
such phrase
is meant to include a plurality of Ys and Z. For example, such phrase is meant
to include X
and a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and a
plurality of Zs. For
example, such phrase is meant to include Y and a plurality of Zs. The
conjunction "and/or" is
meant to have the same effect as the phrase "X, Y, Z, or any combination or
plurality thereof."
The conjunction "and/or" is meant to have the same effect as the phrase "one
or more X, Y,
Z, or any combination thereof." The conjunction "and/or" is meant to have the
same effect as
the phrase "at least one X, Y, Z, or any combination thereof."
[0093] In some embodiments, a display construct that is coupled
with a viewing (e.g., a
tintable viewing) window. The viewing window may include an integrated glass
unit. The
display construct may include one or more glass panes. The display (e.g.,
display matrix)
may comprise a light emitting diode (LED). The LED may comprise an organic
material (e.g.,
organic light emitting diode abbreviated herein as "OLED"). The OLED may
comprise a
transparent organic light emitting diode display (abbreviated herein as
"TOLED"), which
TOLED is at least partially transparent. The display may have at its
fundamental length scale
2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, or 8000 pixels. The display may have at
its
fundamental length scale any number of pixels between the aforementioned
number of
pixels (e.g., from about 2000 pixels to about 4000 pixels, from about 4000
pixels to about
8000 pixels, or from about 2000 pixels to about 8000 pixels). A fundamental
length scale
may comprise a diameter of a bounding circle, a length, a width, or a height.
The
fundamental length scale may be abbreviated herein as "FLS." The display
construct may
comprise a high resolution display. For example, the display construct may
have a resolution
of at least about 550, 576, 680, 720, 768, 1024, 1080, 1920, 1280, 2160, 3840,
4096, 4320,
or 7680 pixels, by at least about 550, 576, 680, 720, 768, 1024, 1080, 1280,
1920, 2160,
3840, 4096, 4320, or 7680 pixels (at 30Hz or at 60Hz). The first number of
pixels may
19
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
designate the height of the display and the second pixels may designates the
length of the
display. For example, the display may be a high resolution display having a
resolution of
1920 x 1080, 3840 x2160, 4096 x2160, or 7680 x 4320. The display may be a
standard
definition display, enhanced definition display, high definition display, or
an ultra-high
definition display. The display may be rectangular. The image projected by the
display matrix
may be refreshed at a frequency (e.g., at a refresh rate) of at least about 20
Hz, 30 Hz, 60
Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, or 120 Hertz (Hz). The FLS of the display
construct may
be at least 20", 25", 30", 35", 40", 45", 50", 55", 60", 65", 80", 0r90 inches
("). The FLS of the
display construct can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g.,
from about
20" to about 55", from about 55" to about 100", or from about 20" to about
100").
[0094] In some embodiments, at least a portion of a window surface
in a facility is utilized
to display the various media using the glass display construct. The display
may be utilized
for (e.g., at least partial) viewing an environment external to the window
(e.g., outdoor
environment), e.g., when the display is not operating. The display may be used
to display
media (e.g., as disclosed herein), to augment the external view with (e.g.,
optical) overlays,
augmented reality, and/or lighting (e.g., the display may act as a light
source). The media
may be used for entertainment and non-entertainment purposes. The media may be
used for
work (e.g., data analysis, drafting, and/or video conferencing). The media may
be
manipulated (e.g., by utilizing the display construct). Utilizing the display
construct can be
direct or indirect. Indirect utilization of the media may be using an input
device such as an
electronic mouse, or a keyboard. The input device may be communicatively
(e.g., wired
and/or wirelessly) coupled to the media. Direct utilization may be by using
the display
construct as a touch screen using a user (e.g., finger) or a directing device
(e.g., an
electronic pen or stylus). The directing device may be made or, and/or coated
with a low
abrasive material (e.g., a polymer). The low abrasive material may be
configured to facilitate
(e.g., repeatedly) contacting the display construct with minimal damage (e.g.,
scratching) to
the display construct. the low abrasive material may comprise a polymer or
resin (e.g.,
plastic). The directing device may be passive or active. The active directing
device may
operatively couple to the display construct and/or network. The active
directing device may
comprise a circuitry. The active directing device may comprise a remote
controller. The
directing device may facilitate direction of operations related to media
presented by the
display construct. The directing device may facilitate (e.g., real time and/or
in situ) interaction
with the media presented by the display construct.
[0095] Embodiments described herein relate to vision windows with a tandem
(e.g.,
transparent) display construct. In certain embodiments, the vision window is
an
electrochromic window. The electrochromic window may comprise a solid state
and/or
inorganic electrochromic (EC) device. The vision window may be in the form of
an integrated
glass unit (IGU). When the IGU includes an electrochromic (abbreviated herein
as "EC")
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
device, it may be termed an "EC IGU." The EC IGU can tint (e.g., darken) a
room in which it
is disposed and/or provide a tinted (e.g., darker) background as compared to a
non-tinted
IGU. The tinted IGU can provide a background preferable (e.g., necessary) for
acceptable
(e.g., good) contrast on the (e.g., transparent) display construct. In another
example,
windows with (e.g., transparent) display constructs can replace televisions
(abbreviated
herein as "TVs") in commercial and residential applications. Together, the
(e.g., transparent)
display construct and EC IGU can provide visual privacy glass function, e.g.,
because the
display can augment the privacy provided by EC glass alone. Embodiments
disclosed herein
also describe particular methods, apparatus and systems for mounting display
constructs
(e.g., transparent display) to framing systems of vision windows.
[0096] In various embodiments, a network infrastructure supports a control
system for one
or more windows such as tintable (e.g., electrochromic) windows. The control
system may
comprise one or more controllers operatively coupled (e.g., directly or
indirectly) to one or
more windows. While the disclosed embodiments describe tintable windows (also
referred to
herein as "optically switchable windows," or "smart windows") such as
electrochromic
windows, the concepts disclosed herein may apply to other types of switchable
optical devices
comprising a liquid crystal device, an electrochromic device, suspended
particle device (SPD),
NanoChromics display (NOD), Organic electroluminescent display (OELD),
suspended
particle device (SPD), NanoChromics display (NOD), or an Organic
electroluminescent display
(OELD). The display element may be attached to a part of a transparent body
(such as the
windows). The tintable window may be disposed in a (non-transitory) facility
such as a building,
and/or in a transitory facility (e.g., vehicle) such as a car, RV, bus, train,
airplane, helicopter,
ship, or boat.
[0097]
In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (e.g., controllable
and/or
reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, e.g., when
a stimulus is
applied. The change may be a continuous change. A change may be to discrete
tint levels
(e.g., to at least about 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 tint levels). The optical property
may comprise hue, or
transmissivity. The hue may comprise color. The transmissivity may be of one
or more
wavelengths. The wavelengths may comprise ultraviolet, visible, or infrared
wavelengths. The
stimulus can include an optical, electrical and/or magnetic stimulus. For
example, the stimulus
can include an applied voltage and/or current. One or more tintable windows
can be used to
control lighting and/or glare conditions, e.g., by regulating the transmission
of solar energy
propagating through them. One or more tintable windows can be used to control
a temperature
within a building, e.g., by regulating the transmission of solar energy
propagating through the
window. Control of the solar energy may control heat load imposed on the
interior of the facility
(e.g., building). The control may be manual and/or automatic. The control may
be used for
maintaining one or more requested (e.g., environmental) conditions, e.g.,
occupant comfort.
The control may include reducing energy consumption of a heating, ventilation,
air conditioning
21
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
and/or lighting systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air
conditioning may be
induced by separate systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air
conditioning may be
induced by one system. The heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be
induced by a
single system (abbreviated herein as "HVAC"). In some cases, tintable windows
may be
responsive to (e.g., and communicatively coupled to) one or more environmental
sensors
and/or user control. Tintable windows may comprise (e.g., may be)
electrochromic windows.
The windows may be located in the range from the interior to the exterior of a
structure (e.g.,
facility, e.g., building). However, this need not be the case. Tintable
windows may operate
using liquid crystal devices, suspended particle devices,
microelectromechanical systems
(MEMS) devices (such as microshutters), or any technology known now, or later
developed,
that is configured to control light transmission through a window. Windows
(e.g., with MEMS
devices for tinting) are described in U.S. Patent No. 10,359,681, issued July
23, 2019, filed
May 15, 2015, titled "MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES
AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES," and incorporated herein by reference
in its entirety. In some cases, one or more tintable windows can be located
within the interior
of a building, e.g., between a conference room and a hallway. In some cases,
one or more
tintable windows can be used in automobiles, trains, aircraft, and other
vehicles, e.g., in lieu
of a passive and/or non-tinting window.
[0098] In some embodiments, a plurality of devices may be operatively (e.g.,
communicatively) coupled to the control system. The devices may include a
window (e.g.,
tintable window), a sensor, an emitter, or a transceiver. The plurality of
devices may be
disposed in a facility (e.g., including a building and/or room). The control
system may comprise
the hierarchy of controllers. The devices may comprise an emitter, a sensor,
or a window (e.g.,
IGU). The device may be any device as disclosed herein. At least two of the
plurality of devices
may be of the same type. For example, two or more IGUs may be coupled to the
control
system. At least two of the plurality of devices may be of different types.
For example, a sensor
and an emitter may be coupled to the control system. At times the plurality of
devices may
comprise at least 20, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, 50000,
100000, or 500000
devices. The plurality of devices may be of any number between the
aforementioned numbers
(e.g., from 20 devices to 500000 devices, from 20 devices to 50 devices, from
50 devices to
500 devices, from 500 devices to 2500 devices, from 1000 devices to 5000
devices, from 5000
devices to 10000 devices, from 10000 devices to 100000 devices, or from 100000
devices to
500000 devices). For example, the number of windows in a floor may be at least
5, 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 40, or 50. The number of windows in a floor can be any number between
the
aforementioned numbers (e.g., from 5 to 50, from 5 to 25, or from 25 to 50).
At times the
devices may be in a multi-story building. At least a portion of the floors of
the multi-story
building may have devices controlled by the control system (e.g., at least a
portion of the floors
of the multi-story building may be controlled by the control system). For
example, the multi-
22
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
story building may have at least 2, 8, 10, 25, 50, 80, 100, 120, 140, or 160
floors that are
controlled by the control system. The number of floors (e.g., devices therein)
controlled by the
control system may be any number between the aforementioned numbers (e.g.,
from 2 to 50,
from 25 to 100, or from 80 to 160). The floor may be of an area of at least
about 150 m2, 250
m2, 500m2, 1000 m2, 1500 m2, or 2000 square meters (m2). The floor may have an
area
between any of the aforementioned floor area values (e.g., from about 150 m2
to about 2000
m2, from about 150 m2to about 500 M2' from about 250 m2 to about 1000 m2, or
from about
1000 m2 to about 2000 m2). The building may comprise an area of at least about
1000 square
feet (sqft), 2000 sqft, 5000 sqft, 10000 sqft, 100000 sqft, 150000 sqft,
200000 sqft, or 500000
sqft. The building may comprise an area between any of the above mentioned
areas (e.g.,
from about 1000 sqft to about 5000 sqft, from about 5000 sqft to about 500000
sqft, or from
about 1000 sqft to about 500000 sqft). The building may comprise an area of at
least about
100m2, 200 m2, 500 m2, 1000 m2, 5000 m2, 10000 m2, 25000 m2, or 50000 m2. The
building
may comprise an area between any of the above mentioned areas (e.g., from
about 100m2 to
about 1000 m2, from about 500nn2to about 25000 m2, from about 100nn2to about
50000 m2).
The facility may comprise a commercial or a residential building. The
commercial building may
include tenant(s) and/or owner(s). The residential facility may comprise a
multi or a single
family building. The residential facility may comprise an apartment complex.
The residential
facility may comprise a single family home. The residential facility may
comprise multifamily
homes (e.g., apartments). The residential facility may comprise townhouses.
The facility may
comprise residential and commercial portions. The facility may comprise at
least about 1, 2,
5, 10, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 420, 450, 500, or 550 windows
(e.g., tintable
windows). The windows may be divided into zones (e.g., based at least in part
on the location,
façade, floor, ownership, utilization of the enclosure (e.g., room) in which
they are disposed,
any other assignment metric, random assignment, or any combination thereof.
Allocation of
windows to the zone may be static or dynamic (e.g., based on a heuristic).
There may be at
least about 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 30, 40, or 46 windows per zone.
[0099] Fig. 1A shows an example of a window 102 framed in a window frame 103
(partial
view shown), and a fastener structure 104 comprising a first hinge 105a and a
second hinge
105b, which hinges facilitate rotating display construct 101 about the hinge
axis, e.g., in a
direction of arrow 111. The window may be an electrochromic window. The window
may be
in the form of an EC IGU. In one embodiment, mounted to window frame (e.g.,
103) is one or
more display constructs (e.g., transparent display) (e.g., 101) that is
transparent at least in
part. In one embodiment, the one or more display constructs (e.g., transparent
display)
comprises T-OLED technology, but it should be understood that the present
invention should
not be limited by or to such technology. In one embodiment, one or more
display constructs
(e.g., transparent display) is mounted to frame (e.g., 103) via a fastener
structure (e.g., 104).
In one embodiment the fastener structure (also referred to herein as a
"fastener") comprises
23
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
a bracket. In one embodiment, the fastener structure comprises an L-bracket.
In one
embodiment, L-bracket comprises a length that approximates or equals a length
of a side of
window (e.g., and in the example shown in FiglA, also the length of the
fastener 104). In
embodiments, the fundamental length scale (e.g., length) of a window is up to
60 feet (`), 50',
40', 30', 25', 20', 15', 10', 5' or 1'. The FLS of the window can be of any
value between the
aforementioned values (e.g., from Ito 60', from Ito 30', from 30' to 60', or
from 10' to 40').
In embodiments, the fundamental length scale (e.g., length) of a window is at
least about
50', 60', 80', or 100'. In one embodiment, the display construct (e.g.,
transparent display)
encompasses an area that (e.g., substantially) matches a surface area of the
lite (e.g.,
pane). The fastener structure may be mounted to the structure (e.g., frame
portion such as a
mullion) via a locking mechanism (e.g., snap fit lock) and/or via screw(s),
e.g., may be
configured for a slip and snap attachment. the fastener may comprise a
mounting plate. The
fastener may be configured to allow its associated cabling and/or wiring to
reside in the
supporting structure cavity (e.g., framing portion) without exerting pressure
on the supporting
structure (e.g., fixture). The supporting structure may comprise a clip (e.g.,
spring clip) to
hold the fastener in place.
[0100] In particular embodiments, the area of the display
approximates the vision area of
a window (e.g., the area within the framing system of the window (e.g., see 1
in Fig. 1B)). In
one embodiment, one or more display constructs (e.g., transparent display),
together, (e.g.,
approximately and/or substantially) cover the vision area of a window (e.g.,
see 2 and 3 in
Fig. 1b). In one embodiment, a transparent display encompasses an area that is
about half
of the vision area of a (e.g., tintable) window. In one embodiment, two or
more displays are
mounted over a single vision window (see 2 and 3 in Fig. 1b). The display
construct can
cover at least a portion of the (e.g., tintable) window. The display construct
can cover at least
about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible
portion
of the (e.g., tintable) window. The area occupied by the display construct can
be the entire
(100%) of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable) window. The area
occupied by the display
construct can be any percentage of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable)
window between
the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 10% to about 100%, from about
10% to
about 50%, or from about 50% to about 100%). At times a plurality of display
constructs can
cover the (e.g., tintable) window. The display construct can be mounted in one
or more
layouts and/or configurations, e.g., to maximize design flexibility. A
plurality of fasteners can
be coupled (e.g., respectively) to the plurality of display constructs (e.g.,
to allow swiveling of
the display constructs). Fig. 1B shows an example of various windows in a
facade 120 of a
building, which facade comprises windows 122, 123, and 121, and display
constructs 1, 2,
and 3. In the example shown in Fig. 1B, display construct 1 is transparent at
least in part and
is disposed over window 123 (e.g., display construct 1 is super positioned
over window 123)
such that the entirety of window 123 is covered by the display construct, and
a user can view
24
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
through the display construct 1 and the window 123 the external environment
(e.g., flowers,
glass, and trees). Display construct 1 is coupled to the window with a
fastener that facilitates
rotation of the display construct about an axis parallel to the window bottom
horizontal edge,
which rotation is in the direction of arrow 127. In the example shown in Fig.
1B, display
constructs 2 and 3 are transparent at least in part and are disposed over
window 121 such
that the entirety of window 121 is covered by the two display construct each
covering (e.g.,
extending to) about half of the surface area of window 121, and a user can
view through the
display constructs 2 and 3 and the window 121 the external environment (e.g.,
flowers,
glass, and trees). Display construct 2 is coupled to the window 121 with a
fastener that
facilitates rotation of the display construct about an axis parallel to the
window left vertical
edge, which rotation is in the direction of arrow 126. Display construct 3 is
coupled to the
window with a fastener that facilitates rotation of the display construct
about an axis parallel
to the window 121 right vertical edge, which rotation is in the direction of
arrow 125.
[0101] In some embodiments, the display construct is coupled to a
structure (e.g., a
fixture). The structure may comprise a window, a wall, or a board. The display
construct may
be coupled to the structure with a fastener. There may be a distance between
the display
construct and the structure, e.g., when the display construct is operational.
The distance
may be at most about 0.5 meters (m), 0.4m, 0.3m, 0.2m, 0.1m, 0.05m, 0.025m, or
0.01m.
[0102] In some embodiments, the E-box is operatively coupled to,
or includes, a power
supply. The power supply can be an electrical device that supplies electric
power to an
electrical load. The power supply can convert electric current from a source
to the correct
voltage, current, and/or frequency to power the load. The power supply may
limit the current
drawn by the load to safe levels (e.g., according to jurisdictional and/or
safety standards),
shut off the current (e.g., in the event of an electrical fault), condition
power (e.g., to prevent
electronic noise and/or voltage surges on the input from reaching the load),
correct power-
factor, and/or store energy (e.g., to facilitate continued operation of the
load in the event of a
temporary interruption in the source power). The load may be the media display
(e.g., OLED
display). The power supply may be an electric power converter. The power
supply can be a
separate standalone device. The power supply can be included in the E-box. The
standalone
power supply device can be disposed in a structure such as a fixture. The
structure can
comprise a window frame portion (e.g., mullion or transom), or a wall. The
power supply
device can be disposed at a distance from the E-box and/or timing controller.
The distance
may be at least about 30 feet 0, 50', 100', 200', 300'. The E-box may or may
not be part of
the fastener (e.g., attached to the fastener). In some embodiments, the E-box
(e.g., including
any analogue to digital converter) may be disposed at a distance from the
fastener (e.g., not
be part of the fastener).
[0103] In some embodiments, housing of an electronic component
(e.g., circuitry)
comprises at least one heat exchanger. For example, the E-box, power supply
housing,
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
and/or timing controller housing (e.g., fastener) may comprise one or more
heat exchangers
(e.g., as disclosed herein). The heat exchangers may be fans. The heat
exchangers may be
passive or active. The heat exchangers may comprise a heat pipe. The heat
exchangers
may comprise a component configured to efficiently absorb and/or transfer
heat. For
example, the heat exchanger may comprise a metal slab (e.g., heat sink). The
metal slap
may comprise elemental metal or metal alloy.
[0104] In some embodiments, the housing of an electronic component
(e.g., fastener)
may comprise one or more fans. The fans may direct gas (e.g., air) from one of
its sides to
the other (e.g., pushing gas into the ambient environment or puling gas out of
the ambient
environment). The direction of the fan rotation may determine its
pushing/pulling gas
functionality. The fan may have a fundamental length scale (e.g., height,
length, width,
radius, or radius of a bounding circle). The fundamental length scale (FLS) of
the fan may be
at most about 5 centimeters (cm), 4cm, 3cm, 2.5cm, 2cm, 1.5 cm, lcm, or 0.5cm.
The FLS
may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5cm to
about
0.5cnn, from about 5cnn to about 2cm, or from about 2cm to about 0.5cnn). The
height and
the length of the fan may be (e.g., substantially) equal. The width of the fan
may be at most
about half, third, fourth, or fifth of the height and/or length of the fan.
The fan may have a
plurality of blades (e.g., at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 blades). In
some embodiments, the
fan may be bladeless. The fan may require low voltage, e.g., of at most about
1.5 volts (V),
2V, 3V, 4V, 5V, 6V, 7V, 8V, 9V, or 10V. The speed of the fan may be at least
about 5
thousand revolutions per minutes (KRPM), 5.5 KRPM, 6 KRPM, 6.5 KRPM, 7 KRPM,
7.5
KRPM, 8 KRPM, 8.5 KRPM, 9 KRPM, 9.5 KRPM, 10 KRPM, 10.5 KRPM, 11 KRPM, 11.5
KRPM, or 12 KRPM. The fan may have a low noise signature. The low noise
signature may
be of at most about 10.0 decibels (dbA), 15 dbA, 20, 25 dbA, or 30 dbA,
wherein dbA values
are adjusted for varying sensitivity of a human ear to different frequencies
of sound. The low
noise signature may be below a speaking sound (e.g., of about 65dbA). The low
noise
signature may be at most in the order of a breathing noise (e.g., of about
10dbA), of a silent
study room (e.g., of about 20dbA), of a soft whisper (e.g., of about 40dbA),
or of an office
environment (e.g., from about 50 dbA to about 65 dbA). The noise level of the
fan may abide
by jurisdictional standards, e.g., by standards promulgated by the
Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA). The fan may have a weight of at most about 5
grams (g), 6g,
8g, or 10g. The fan may have a conduction capacity of air of at least about
0.02 cubic meters
per minute (M3/min), 0.03 M3/min, 0.04 M3/min, 0.05 M3/min, 0.06 M3/min, 0.07
M3/min, 0.08
M3/min, 0.09 M3/min, 0.1 M3/min, 0.15 M3/min, 0.2 M3/min, 0.3 M3/min, 0.4
M3/min, or 0.5
M3/min. The fan may have a conduction capacity between any of the conduction
capacities
mentioned herein (e.g., from about 0.02 M3/min to about 0.05 M3/min, from
about 0.05
M3/min to about 0.1 M3/min, or from about 0.1 M3/min to about 0.5 M3/min).
26
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0105] In some embodiments, at least two of the plurality of
circuit boards may be
disposed in a manner that facilitates shielding, heat exchange and/or cooling
element
disposed therebetween. At least one shielding element may be disposed between
a first
circuit board and a second circuit board that are located (e.g., directly)
adjacent to each
other. The shielding element may comprise electrical and/or electromagnetic
(e.g., radio
frequency) shielding. The shielding may or may not act as a heat exchanger
and/or cooling
element. The housing of an electronic component may comprise a heat exchanger
and/or
cooling element that is separate from the shielding. The heat exchanger and/or
cooling
element may comprise a heat pipe, or a metallic slab. Metallic may comprise
elemental
metal or metal alloy. The metal may be configured for (e.g., efficient and/or
rapid) heat
conduction. The metal may comprise copper, aluminum, brass, steel, or bronze.
The cooling
element may comprise a fluid, gaseous, or semisolid (e.g., gel) material. The
cooling
element may be active and/or passive. The cooling element may comprise a
circulating
substance. The cooling element may be operatively coupled to an active cooling
device
(e.g., thermostat, cooler, and/or refrigerator). The active cooling device may
be disposed
externally to the device ensemble housing. The cooling element may be disposed
in a fixture
(e.g., the floor, ceiling, wall, or framing) of the enclosure (e.g., building
or room) in which the
housing of an electronic component is disposed. The fixture may comprise a
mullion or
transom.
[0106] In some embodiments, the display construct assembly can accept one or
more
connector types for media signal and/or electricity. For example, at least one
connector
and/or socket to one or more drivers and/or receivers, e.g., for use in serial
communications systems (e.g., RS485 (input and output)). The communication may
be
bidirectional. The connector and/or socket may comprise connector to optical
cable(s). The
connector and/or socket types may comprise HDMI, display port (DP) input
and/or output or
alternating current (AC) input and/or switch. Fig. 17 shows an example of a
side of a
controller and power supply assembly 1700 that includes HDMI input 1701, DP1
input 1702,
RS485 input 1703, AC switch and AC input 1704, RS485 output 1705, and DP
output 1706.
Fig 17 shows a perspective disassembled (e.g., exploded) view of a controller
and power
supply assembly 1710 connected to a main power line 1711, a window controller
1712, an
IGU 1715, framing cap 1718 (sometimes referred to as "beauty cap"), window
frame 1719,
circuitry 1716 (e.g., comprising a booster and/or driver for the display
matrix), hinges (e.g.,
hinge 1717), display construct 1714, cover 1720, and a display construct frame
(e.g., edge
bezel) 1713 for the display construct. The display construct frame can be a
cover for the
touch screen component(s). The window controller may be disposed to the side
of the
window, closer or further from the window. The window controller may be
disposed in (or on)
the window frame, in (or on) a wall, in (or on) a ceiling, in (or on) a floor.
The hinge may or
27
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
may not be temporarily locked (e.g., using insertions (e.g., slits or
crevices), protrusions,
and/or spring (e.g., spring plunger)).
[0107] In some embodiments, the display construct is registered
with a viewing window
(e.g., Integrated glass unit abbreviated herein as "IGU"). The display
construct may be
configured to be positioned on at least a portion of a (e.g., tintable)
window. For example,
the display construct may be configured to be super positioned with at least a
portion of the
window. The display construct may be configured to facilitate simultaneous
viewing from one
side of a window (e.g., internal environment) to its opposing side (e.g.,
external
environment). The display construct may be position in the light of sight of a
user viewing
through a window (or any portion thereof).
[0108] In some embodiments, a controller is operatively coupled
(e.g., communicatively
coupled) with the display construct. The communication may be wired and/or
wireless. The
controller may control the display construct at least partially automatically.
The controller
may be a timing controller (e.g., T-CON), e.g., as disclosed herein. The
control may include
electronic and/or optical control. The controller may comprise a
microcontroller. The
controller may be disposed adjacent to the glass (e.g., IGU) and/or display
construct. The
controller may be disposed in a window frame (e.g., transom or mullion). In
some
embodiments, a mullion (e.g., Fig. 1B, 131) is a vertical run of window
framing, and a
transom (e.g., Fig. 1B, 130) is a horizontal run of window framing. The window
frame may
(e.g., directly or indirectly) hold the glass and/or display construct. The
glass may be a
tintable glass. The tintable glass may be controlled (e.g., using at least one
controller). For
example, the tintable glass may be controlled by a hierarchy of controllers
(e.g., see Fig. 15).
The hierarchy of controllers may be static or dynamic (e.g., in which the
hierarchical
designation of controllers is dynamically altered). The one or more
controllers that control the
viewing (e.g., tintable) window may or may not control the display construct
(also referred to
herein as "media display construct").
[0109] In some embodiments, the display construct comprises glass. The glass
may be in
the form of one or more glass pane. For example, the display construct may
include a
display matrix (e.g., an array of lights) disposed between two glass panes.
The array of lights
may include an array of colored lights. For example, an array of red, green,
and blue colored
lights. For example, an array of cyan, magenta, and yellow colored lights. The
array of lights
may include light colors used in electronic screen display. The array of
lights may comprise
an array of LEDs (e.g., OLEDs, e.g., TOLEDs). The matrix display (e.g., array
of lights) may
be at least partially transparent (e.g., to an average human eye). The
transparent OLED may
facilitate transition of a substantial portion (e.g., greater than about 30%,
40%, 50%, 60%,
80%, 90% or 95%) of the intensity and/or wavelength to which an average human
eye
senses. The matrix display may form minimal disturbance to a user looking
through the
array. The array of lights may form minimal disturbance to a user looking
through a window
28
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
on which the array is disposed. The display matrix (e.g., array of lights) may
be maximally
transparent. At least one glass pane of the display construct may be of a
regular glass
thickness. The regular glass may have a thickness of at least about 1
millimeters (mm),
2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5nnm, or 6 mm. The regular glass may have a thickness of a
value
between any of the aforementioned values (e.g., from 1mm to 6mm, from 1mm to
3mm, from
3mm to about 4mm, or from 4mm to 6mm). At least one glass pane of the display
construct
may be of a thin glass thickness. The thin glass may have a thickness of at
most about 0.4
millimeters (mm), 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8mm, or 0.9mm thick. The thin
glass may
have a thickness of a value between any of the aforementioned values (e.g.,
from 0.4mm to
0.9mm, from 0.4mm to 0.7mm, or from 0.5mm to 0.9mm). The glass of the display
construct
may be at least transmissive (e.g., in the visible spectrum). For example, the
glass may be at
least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% transmissive. The glass may have a
transmissivity
percentage value between any of the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from
about 80% to
about 99%). The display construct may comprise one or more panes (e.g., glass
panes). For
example, the display construct may comprise a plurality (e.g., two) of panes.
The glass
panes may have (e.g., substantially) the same thickness, or different
thickness. The front
facing pane may be thicker than the back facing pane. The back facing pane may
be thicker
than the front facing pane. Front may be in a direction of a prospective
viewer (e.g., in front
of display construct 101, looking at display construct 101). Back may be in
the direction of a
(e.g., tintable) window (e.g., 102). One glass may be thicker relative to
another glass. The
thicker glass may be at least about 1.25*, 1.5*, 2*, 2.5*, 3*, 3.5*, or 4*
thicker than the
thinner glass. The symbol "*" designates the mathematical operation of
"times." The
transmissivity of the display construct (that including the one or more panes
and the display
matrix (e.g., light-array or LCD)) may be of at least about 20%, 30%, 35%,
40%, 45%, 50%,
60%, 70%, 80%, or 90%. The display construct may have a transmissivity
percentage value
between any of the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 20% to about
90%, from
about 20% to about 50%, from about 20% to about 40%, from about 30% to about
40%,
from about 40% to about 80%, or from about 50% to about 90%). A higher
transmissivity
parentage refers higher intensity and/or broader spectrum of light that passes
through a
material (e.g., glass). The transmissivity may be of visible light. The
transmissivity may be
measured as visible transmittance (abbreviated herein as "Tvis") referring to
the amount of
light in the visible portion of the spectrum that passes through a material.
The transmissivity
may be relative to the intensity of incoming light. The display construct may
transmit at least
about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible spectrum of light (e.g.,
wavelength
spectrum) therethrough. The display construct may transmit a percentage value
between
any of the aforementioned percentages (e.g., from about 80% to about 99%). In
some
embodiments, instead of an array of lights, a liquid crystal display is
utilized. Fig. 2 shows a
schematic example of a display construct assembly 200 prior to its lamination,
which display
29
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
construct includes a thicker supportive structure (e.g., glass pane) 205, a
first adhesive layer
204, a display matrix 203, a second adhesive layer 202, and a thinner
supportive structure
(e.g., glass pane) 201, which matrix is connected via wiring 211 to a
circuitry 212 that
controls at least an aspect of the display construct, which display construct
is coupled to a
fastener 213.
[0110] The display matrix has reflectance and/or color properties. The display
matrix can
be colored, gray scale, or black and white. The display matrix may have a
color depth. The
color depth may be at least about 0.25, 0.5, 1, 1.25, or 1.5 billion colors.
The color depth
may be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.25
billion colors
to about 1.5 billion colors, from about 0.25 billion colors to about 1.25
billion colors, or from
about 1 billion colors to about 1.5 billion colors). The display construct may
have a contrast
ratio of at least about 100000, 120000, 150000, 170000, or 200000, to one. The
display
construct may have a contrast ratio relative to one between any of the above
reference
values (e.g., from about 100000:1 to about 200000:1, from about 100000:1 to
about
150000:1, or from about 150000:1 to 200000:1). The reflectance of the display
construct
may be at most about 2%, 4%, 8%, 10%, 14%, or 18%. The reflectance of the
display
construct may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from
about 2% to
about 18%, or from about 2% to about 14%).
[0111] In some embodiments, the at least one glass pane of the
display construct and/or
in the IGU, is strengthened. At least one glass of the display construct
and/or IGU may be a
native glass (e.g., that did not undergo strengthening and/or tempering
process). The glass
may be a strengthened glass. The strengthened glass may be heat strengthened,
heat
tempered, or chemically strengthened. The chemically strengthen glass may be
chemically
tempered glass. The chemically strengthened glass may include Gorilla glass.
The glass
may comprise used SentryGlass(R). The chemically strengthened glass may
comprise one or
more ion (e.g., cation) doped glass. The cation may be an alkali (e.g.,
potassium) or alkali
earth cation. The glass may comprise one or more pigments. The glass may allow
transition
of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light therethrough. The glass
may reduce
(e.g., prevent) penetration of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV
light therethrough.
The glass may absorb at least part of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity
of) UV light. In
some embodiments, the glass may comprise a surface treatment (e.g., sanding).
[0112] In some embodiments, the display construct may include a
binder (e.g., a laminate
and/or adhesive). In some embodiments, the display construct may include a
binder that
includes a polymer and/or resin. The binder may be disposed between a glass
pane and the
display matrix. The binder may be chosen to facilitate formation of the
construct (e.g.,
adhesion of the display matrix to the glass pane) with minimally (e.g.,
without) damaging the
display matrix. The binder may be cured by heat and/or UV treatment. The
temperature of
the heat treatment may be such that minimally damages the display matrix
(e.g., not
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
damages the display matrix to a measurable and/or substantial degree). Not
damage the
array to a substantial degree may refer to not damaging the array to a degree
that affects its
intended purpose (e.g., performance as a display according to its
specification). The binder
may include at least one organic polymer. The at least one organic polymer may
include
Polyvinyl butyral (PVB), Ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA), Polyacrylamide, SGP
resin (e.g., SGP
5000 of Dupont). The binder may comprise OCA, e.g., by 3M (e.g., 3M 8211, 3M
8212, 3M
8213, 3M 8214, 3M 8215, 3M 8171, or 3M 8172). The polymer(s) may allow
transition of
(e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV light therethrough. The polymer
may reduce
(e.g., prevent) penetration of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity of) UV
light therethrough.
The polymer may absorb at least part of (e.g., the wavelength and/or intensity
of) UV light.
[0113] In some embodiments, the display construct comprises
lamination. The display
construct may comprise a tintable device (e.g., electrochromic device). The
tintable device
may be laminated onto the display construct (to form a single display
construct unit). For
example, the display construct may comprise deposited electrochromic layer
construct (e.g.,
deposited on the back side of the media display (e.g., back side of the LEDs).
The display
construct may comprise one or more layers (e.g., deposited and/or laminated
layers) to
protect the media display from radiation (e.g., UV and/or IR radiation). The
added layering
may constitute a film (e.g., electrochromic device, UV protective layering,
and/or IR
protective layering). The film may be part of the display construct. The film
may facilitate
longer operational lifetime of the display construct. The film may facilitate
greater contrast of
the media displayed. The display construct (e.g., including the electrochromic
film) may be
coupled to a tintable (e.g., electrochromic) window. The film may constitute
any tintable
window capability (e.g., liquid crystals device, suspended particle device,
microelectromechanical system (MEMS) device (such as micro shutters), or any
technology
configured to control light transmission through a window). The liquid crystal
device may
comprise a polymer dispersed liquid crystal layer.
[0114] In some embodiments, the display construct may comprise a binder in a
form of at
least one layer. The binder may include at least one optically clear adhesive
layer
(abbreviated herein as "OCA" layer). For example, the display construct may
comprise two
binder layers. The binder layers may have a thickness of at least about 0.2
mm, 0.3 mm, 0.4
mm, 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.9 mm, or 1 mm. The binder layers may
have a
thickness of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about
0.2mm to about
1mm, from about 0.2mm to about 0.6 mm, or from about 0.7 to about 1mm). The
binder
thickness may be chosen to minimize weight, e.g., while sufficiently binding
the construct to
form a high tolerance construct that can be machine cut (e.g., have a high die-
cut machine
tolerance). The binder may increase durability and/or optical characteristics
of the display
construct, as compared to a display construct devoid the binder. The binder
may be (e.g.,
substantially and/or entirely) transparent (e.g., to the visible light). The
binder may be
31
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
uncolored. The binder may contact the (e.g., largest) surface of the display
matrix and the
(e.g., largest) surface of a pane (e.g., glass pane), thus binding the display
matrix to the
pane. The binder may minimally (e.g., not) contribute to an optically and/or
visibly distort the
displayed media by the display.
[0115] In some embodiments, the pane(s), binder, and display
matrix are cured before
deployment. The curing can be by UV light, moisture, and/or heat. The curing
method may
be selected to preserve the functionality of the display matrix, and minimize
any optical
distortion (e.g., maximize transmittance, reduce haze, and/or gas gaps such as
air gaps).
The binder may increase the durability of the display construct. For example,
the binder can
reduce the breakage susceptible of the display construct, and/or reduce its
flammability. The
binder may facilitate adjustment of a refractive index of a pane to ambient
air (e.g., where
the viewer is), e.g., to (i) minimize loss due to any Fresnel reflection, (ii)
transmit all colors
with minimal distortion through the display construct, and/or (iii) enhance
the image
projected by the display construct. The distortion of colors may be due to
their passage
through the binder, through the glass pane, and to the ambient air. The
display construct
(e.g., the binder therein) may improve preserve and/or improve an operating
temperature
range of the display matrix. The binder may prevent one or more gasses and/or
debris (e.g.,
dust or sebaceous) to reach the display matrix. The display construct (e.g.,
binder, glass,
and/or any coating) may prevent physical disturbance to the display matrix
(e.g., due to
contact). The contact can be direct contact by a user.
[0116] In some embodiments, the IGU and/or display construct may comprise a
coating
(e.g., an anti-reflective coating). The coating may improve optical
performance of the glass
and/or display construct. The coating may be applied on a glass pane, binder
layer, display
matrix, and/or electrochromic construct. The coating may be deposited in the
form of an anti-
reflective, anti-glare, anti-condensation, anti-scratch, anti-smudge
treatment, and/or anti-UV,
treatment.
[0117] In some embodiments, the display construct may comprise a seal. The
seal may
be disposed between two glasses of the display construct between which the
display matrix
is disposed. The seal may comprise a polymer/resin (e.g., any polymer/resin
disclosed
herein). The seal may comprise a carbon based (e.g., organic) polymer or a
silicon based
polymer. The seal may protect the display construct from light (e.g., UV),
humidity, oxygen,
physical contact (e.g., physical damage), debris, and/or other environmental
components.
[0118] In some embodiments, the display construct is durable over
a prolonged lifetime.
The expected lifetime can be at least about 2y, 5y, by, 15y, 25y, 50y, 75y, or
100 (y) years.
The expected lifetime can be any value between the aforementioned values
(e.g., from
about 5 y to about 100 y, from about 2 y to about 25 y, from about 25 y to
about 50 y, or from
about 50 y to about 100 y). The prolonged lifetime may be at least 20Kh, 30Kh,
50Kh,
100Kh, 500Kh, or 1000Kh (thousand hours). The prolonged lifetime of the
display construct
32
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
may have any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 20Kh to
about
1000Kh, from about 20Kh to about 100Kh, or from about 100Kh to about 1000Kh).
The
number of hours may refer to the number of hours in which the display
construct operates,
e.g., for its intended purpose. The lifetime of the display construct may
depend on its
operating hours and/or any environmental conditions (e.g., UV light, humidity,
and/or
temperature at its deployed site.
[0119] In some embodiments, the display construct is fastened to a
fixture (e.g., window
frame or wall) that holds the (e.g., tintable) window, e.g., by a fastening
mechanism (also
referred to herein as a "fastener."). The fastener may comprise one or more
components.
For example, the fastener can comprise a bracket, a hinge, a cover. The
fastener can be
permanent or impermanent. The impermanent fastener may be removed by manual
labor
and/or automatically. For example, the fastener may comprise one or more
screws that
fasten it to the window frame. The fastener may comprise a hinge and/or
bracket. The hinge
may be flexible. The bracket and/or cover (or any portion thereof) may be
inflexible or non-
flexible. The fastener (e.g., including hinge and/or bracket) may be non-
transparent. The
fastener (e.g., any of its components) may comprise an elemental metal, metal
alloy, an
allotrope of elemental carbon, a polymer, or a composite material. At least
two components
of the fastener can be made of (e.g., substantially) the same type. At least
two components
of the fastener can be made of different material types. The elemental metal
may comprise
aluminum. The metal alloy may comprise steel. The fastener may comprise a non-
corrosive
material. At least a portion of the fastener (e.g., the bracket and/or cover)
may be configured
to carry the weight of the display construct, e.g., without (e.g.,
substantial) deformation over
its intended lifetime (e.g., as disclosed herein). The display construct may
weigh at least
about 5Kg, 10Kg, 15Kg, 20Kg, 25Kg, 30Kg, 35Kg, 40Kg, or 50 kilograms (Kg). The
display
construct may weigh any weight between the aforementioned weights (e.g., from
5Kg to
50Kg, from 5Kg to 25Kg, or from 25Kg to 50Kg). Fig. 3 shows an example of a
vertical cross
section of an assembly 300 (partial view shown) in which a display matrix 311
is disposed
between a first pane 312 and a second pane 313 as part of a display construct,
and an L
shaped bracket 302 disposed between the two glass panes 312 and 313 and
coupled to the
display construct, which L bracket is coupled to a hinge 303.
[0120] In some embodiments, at least a portion of an external
surface of the bracket is
smooth. In some embodiments, at least a portion of an external surface of the
bracket has a
shiny or matt texture. Smooth may refer to an external surface having an Ra
value of at most
60 micrometers ( m), 40 m, or 20 m.
[0121] The fastener may be configured for easy install and/or removal of the
display
construct from the supporting structure (e.g., window frame and/or wall).
Removal may be
for servicing, replacement, and/or upgrade of any portion of the display
construct and/or
33
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
structure (or any associated device). For example, the fastener may allow
(e.g., easy)
removal and/or insertion of display construct. For example, the fastener may
allow (e.g.,
easy) removal and/or insertion of a framing portion to which the fastener is
attached. For
example, the fastener may allow (e.g., easy) removal and/or insertion of a
tintable window
that is supported by the frame to which the fastener is attached. Easy may
refer to low labor
cost, low labor grade (e.g., low labor qualification), and/or short labor
time. The fastener may
be configured to slide and/or lock for installation onto a supporting
structure (e.g., a fixture).
[0122] In some embodiments, a connecting material is disposed between the
display
construct and the fastener (e.g., and the bracket and/or cover). The
connecting material may
comprise a polymer (e.g., as disclosed herein). The connecting material may
comprise a
sealing gasket. The connecting material may be curable (e.g., by heat,
humidity and/or UV).
The connecting material may have low resistance. The connecting material may
comprise at
least one polymer and/or at least one resin. The connecting material may have
a low
electrical resistance such that it is suitable for usage as a packing material
in the electronic
industry (e.g., for snnartphones, packaging, liquid crystal displays, and
personal computers.
The connecting material may comprise polyethylene terephthalate (PET), very
high bond
(VHB) material (e.g., 3M VHB 4926), or SR, or SRS-40P. The connective material
may
comprise an acrylic material. The connecting material may retain its property
and shape in
ambient temperatures. The tensile strength of the connecting material may be
at least about
0.60 MPa, 0.63 MPa, 0.66 MPa, 0.68 MPa, or 0.70 Mega Pascal (MPa). The shear
strength
of the connecting material may be at least about 0.54 MPa, 0.60 MPa, 0.620MPa,
0.64 MPa,
or 0.68 MPa. The shear strength may be smaller than the tensile strength. The
shear
strength and/or tensile strength may be such that they will be able to
facilitate holding the
display construct by the fastener (or any portion of the fattener to which the
display construct
is connected by the connecting material (e.g., adhesive)), e.g., for the
projected life time
and/or use time of the display construct. The connecting material may be hard
and/or
flexible. The connecting material may be an adhesive. The connecting material
may be
softer before its curing, and harder after its curing. The connecting material
may be chosen
to carry at least the load (e.g., weight) of the display construct, e.g.,
during constant and/or
varying conditions (e.g., per its intended purpose). The bracket may include a
straight
portion, a curved portion, and/or a corner. The bracket may be devoid of a
corner. The
bracket may be straight or bent. The bracket may comprise two straight
portions (e.g., two
arms) that form (e.g., about) an angle. The angle may be a right angle or an
obtuse angle.
The bracket can be "L" shaped. An arm of the bracket and/or cover may be
disposed
between two panes, contact the display matrix, and/or contact the binder.
[0123] In some embodiments, wires are hidden from view of a user by the
fastener (e.g.,
or any component thereof). For example, the bracket and/or cover may hide one
or more
(e.g., electrical) wires connected to the display matrix, e.g., from a user.
The wires may be
34
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
connected to the bracket and/or cover. The bracket and/or cover may comprise a
recessed
portion that is configured to accommodate the wire(s). In some embodiments,
the cover and
the bracket are the same component (e.g., 531). The recessed portion may be
hidden from
view of a user (e.g., may be disposed in the back portion of the bracket
and/or cover). The
wire(s) may connect to the display matrix (e.g., light array or LCD). The
wire(s) may connect
to a controller. The controller may comprise a timing controller and/or a
microcontroller. The
connecting material (e.g., connectors) may be disposed along the width (e.g.,
along fastener
structure 104) of display construct. The connecting material may be disposed
along at least
about 50%, 80%, or 90% of the display construct width. The fastener may
comprise a curved
portion. The fastener may comprise a non-curved portion.
[0124] In some embodiments, the fastener comprises a hinge. In some
embodiments, the
hinge includes two leaves connected by a joint that forms an axis about which
the leaves are
configured to move about. A first leaf of the hinge may be operatively coupled
(e.g.,
connected) to the bracket and/or cover. A second leaf of the hinge may be
operatively
coupled (e.g., connected) to a fixture. The fixture may be a wall or a window
frame. The
hinge may facilitate movement of the display construct around the hinge axis.
The joint may
facilitate opening of the hinge to an acute angle, a right angle, an obtuse
angle, a flat angle
(e.g., e.g., 180 ), or complete rotation (e.g., ¨3601. Fastening the hinge to
a fixture and to
the display construct (e.g., via the bracket and/or cover) facilitates
movement of the display
construct about the axis of the hinge joint. Such movement may facilitate
servicing the
display construct without disturbance to the window (e.g., IGU) and/or to the
fixture.
Servicing may include cleaning, repairing, and/or replacing e.g., the display
construct and
any portion or component thereof.
[0125] In some embodiments, the fastener may comprise a plurality of
components. The
plurality of components may comprise a bracket, a cover, a hinge, and/or a
board. The
display construct may be coupled (e.g., connected) to a bracket and/or cover.
The bracket
and/or cover may be coupled to one leaf of the hinge. Another leaf of the
hinge may be
coupled to a fixture indirectly by coupling the other hinge leaf directly to a
board that is
directly connected to a fixture. The board may include any of the fastener
material disclosed
herein (e.g., elemental metal and/or metal alloy). The fastener can include a
plurality of
components of the same type. For example, the fastener can include a plurality
of hinges, a
plurality of brackets, a plurality of covers, and/or a plurality of boards.
The plurality of
fastener components can be at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, or 10 components (e.g., of
the same type
or of different types). The hinge may comprise hinge component set (e.g.,
knuckles and
pintle). The fastener may comprise a plurality of hinge component sets. The
hinge
component sets may be aligned to have a single hinge axis. The fastener may be
formed of
two swiveling leaves about an axis of the hinge complement sets. AT least one
(e.g., each)
of the leaves may comprise a single slab incorporating half of the plurality
of hinge
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
components (e.g., knuckles)), such that when the two leaves are integrated, a
plurality of
functional hinge components sets are created (e.g., as shown in the example of
Fig. 37). In
some embodiments, two leaves having respective hinge components to form a
plurality of
operational hinge components, wherein each of the two leaves is formed of a
single slap of
material, form a fastener that is stronger and/or more durable as compared to
coupling the
display construct to a plurality of separate fasteners each having a single
hinge set. In some
embodiments, two leaves having respective hinge components to form a plurality
of
operational hinge component, wherein each of the two leaves is formed of a
single slab of
material, form a fastener that is easier to install, maintain, and/or replace
as compared to
coupling the display construct to a plurality of separate fasteners each
having a single hinge
set. In some embodiments, two leaves having respective hinge components to
form a
plurality of operational hinge component, wherein each of the two leaves is
formed of a
single slab, facilitate more accurate alignment of the display construct as
compared to
coupling the display construct to a plurality of separate fasteners each
having a single hinge
set. Such a single fastener offers additional advantages such as incorporating
heat
exchangers (e.g., fan), directing the heat exchange (e.g., within the fastener
and/or along the
display construct), and/or coupling one or more circuit boards to the
fastener.
[0126] In some embodiments, at least one leaf of the hinge comprises one or
more holes.
At least one hole of the one or more holes is configured to allow a screw to
pass through and
connect (e.g., reversibly) the hinge to the fixture (e.g., window frame)
and/or bracket. The
connection of the fastener (or any component thereof) to the display construct
and/or fixture
(e.g., window frame) may be (I) irreversible (e.g., using the connecting
material) or (II)
reversible (e.g., using one or more screws). The fixture and/or board may use
both
irreversible and reversible connection between itself and the display
construct. For example,
the hinge may be connected reversibly to the window frame and irreversibly to
the bracket.
For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the bracket and
irreversibly to the
window frame. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the window
frame
and reversibly to the bracket, which will be connected irreversibly (e.g.,
glued) to the display
construct. For example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the wall and
reversibly to
the cover, which will be connected irreversibly (e.g., glued) to the display
construct. For
example, the hinge may be connected reversibly to the board and reversibly to
the cover,
which will be connected irreversibly (e.g., glued) to the display construct.
The board may be
coupled reversibly (e.g., via screw(s)) or irreversibly (e.g., via binder
(e.g., glue)) to the
fixture. Fig. 4 shows a schematic example of a hinge 400 having a first leaf
401 having a
plurality of holes (e.g., 411) that allow movement of a screw in one
direction; and a second
leaf 402 having a plurality of holes that allow movement of a screw in a
second direction,
which first direction may be perpendicular to the second direction. The hinge
shown in Fig. 4
has a joint 420 that facilitates rotation of the first leaf with respect to
the second leaf. In some
36
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
embodiments, the first leaf has hole(s) having a long axis in a first
direction, and the second
leaf has hole(s) having a long axis in a second direction, which first
direction forms an angle
with the second direction that is non-zero (e.g., the first direction can be
perpendicular to the
second direction). Which relative direction of the long axis can be measured
when the hinge
is closed, and the two leaves lie one on top of the other. In some
embodiments, the bracket
may be an extension of a leaf of the hinge. In some embodiments, the bracket
may be
coupled (e.g., fastened) to the leaf of the hinge, e.g., reversibly (e.g., via
crew(s)) or
irreversibly (e.g., via adhesive). In some embodiments, the cover may be an
extension of a
leaf of the hinge. In some embodiments, the cover may be coupled (e.g.,
fastened) to the
leaf of the hinge, e.g., reversibly (e.g., via crew(s)) or irreversibly (e.g.,
via adhesive).
[0127]
In some embodiments, electrical circuitry is communicatively coupled to
the display
construct. The electrical circuitry may (i) boost the signal transmitted to
the display matrix,
and/or (ii) transmit power arriving from a power supply to the display matrix.
In some
embodiments, the circuitry may comprise touch screen circuitry. In some
embodiments, the
touch screen circuitry may be separate (e.g., and be disposed in a touch
screen sensor
cover). In some embodiments, the circuitry may connect touch screen sensor(s)
to the power
supply. In some embodiments, the touch screen circuitry may have a separate
connector to
the power supply.
[0128] Fig. 5 shows an example of an assembly 520 in which a display construct
500
(partial view shown) connected to a fastener that includes an L bracket that
is the first cover
portion 501, a thermal pad 505, flexible electrical connectors such as 506
(MXC) connector,
a circuitry 502 (e.g., a booster board), a flexible insulator 503 and a second
cover portion
504; and 510 shows a schematic bottom view of the circuitry board with screws
and
connectivity, which circuitry board is attached to a cover. The assembly 520
is shown from a
different perspective in 530, indicating the display construct 536, flexible
wiring (e.g., MXC)
535, a first portion of the cover 531 (partial view shown) that is a bracket,
gasket (e.g.,
flexible insulator) 533 (partial view shown), circuitry 532 (partial view
shown), and a second
portion of the cover 534 (partial view shown). The flexible insulator can be a
foam gasket
(e.g., poron). The flexible insulator can have a least 25% compression. The
bracket can
have one or more thermal pads disposed on it. Referring to Fig. 5, in one
embodiment, L-
bracket 501 is seen to extend across a linear dimension of a transparent
display (and affixed
to cover glass 500), which L bracket 501 is the first cover. In one
embodiment, the length of
bracket 501 may be up to about 10 feet. The circuitry (e.g., signal booster)
may be
connected to the display matrix by one or more flexible wiring (e.g., MXC). At
times a
plurality of circuity boards (e.g., at least 2, 3, or 4 boards) may be
disposed in the fastener
(e.g., between the first and second cover). Fig. 5 shown an example of two
circuit boards
502 and 507. One or more (e.g., flexible) connectors may connect the circuity
board to the
flexible display matrix. The number of flexible connectors (e.g., MXCs) may be
at least 2, 5,
37
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
6, 8, or 10. Fig. 5 shows examples of flexible connectors 516, 535, and 506.
One or more
(micro) cable bundles and/or (e.g., micro) coaxial cables may couple (i) the
circuity (e.g.,
booster) disposed in the fastener with (ii) the controller (e.g., timing
controller). One or more
(micro) cable bundles and/or (e.g., micro) coaxial cables may be connected by
a connector
to the circuit board (e.g., the booster board). The number of electrical
connectors (e.g.,
connector 630 (partial view shown), e.g., IPLEX connectors) between the
circuit board and
the controller may be at least 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Fig. 5 shows an example of
the electrical cable
513 connecting the board (e.g., driver board) and the controller (e.g., timing
controller). One
or more fine wiring bundles may connect the controller (e.g., T-CON) to a
booster board that
is connected to flexible connectors (e.g., MXC cable) to the display matrix
(e.g., TOLED).
The fosterer may be configured to secure, house, and/or hide the cables and/or
wiring from
being viewed by a viewer of the display construct.
[0129] The electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables
thereof) may be at least
partially masked from view of a user by the fastener (or any component
thereof, e.g., by the
hinge and/or by the board). The electrical circuity (e.g., and any connecting
cables thereof)
may be at least partially secured from contact by a user. The bracket, cover,
board, and/or
hinge may have an openable portion. The openable portion may swivel around an
axis (e.g.,
the openable portion may swivel around a secondary hinge to facilitate it's
swiveling). The
Fastener may have one or more of its component types (e.g., one or more
brackets, one or
more covers, one or more boards, one or more primary hinges, and/or one or
more
secondary hinges). One or more components of the fastener can span a FLS of
the display
construct and/or viewing window, or a portion thereof. The openable and/or
removable
portion may facilitate servicing the electrical circuitry (e.g., and any
connecting cables
thereof), e.g., without disassembling the fastener from the supporting
structure to which it is
coupled and/or from the display construct. Usage of the opening (coupled with
the
secondary hinge or without any secondary hinge) may facilitate (e.g.,
reversible) detachment
of the connective cabling between (i) the E-box and/or power supply box and
(ii) the circuitry
attached to the display construct (e.g., display construct and/or touch screen
related
circuitry). Such (e.g., reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may
allow replacement
and/or servicing of the E-box and/or of the power supply, without
disassembling the fastener
from the supportive structure and/or from the display construct. Such (e.g.,
reversible)
cabling attachment and detachment may allow replacement and/or servicing of
the display
construct and/or fastener, without disassembling the E-box and/or power supply
unit. Such
(e.g., reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow separation
(e.g.,
disconnection) between (I) the display construct ¨ fastener assembly, and (II)
the E-box
and/or power supply unit. The display construct ¨ fastener assembly may
optionally
comprise touch screen facilitator (e.g., sensor and emitter panels). For
example, the
openable and/or removable portion (e.g., a secondary hinge) may facilitate
servicing a
38
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
booster board or any cables and/or connectors connected thereto. Servicing may
include
removing, repairing, replacing, and/or cleaning. For example, the board may
have a
secondary opening that facilitates exposing at least a portion of the
controller and/or wiring.
Fig. 10 shows an example of a secondary opening including portions 1017 and
1021 as part
of the fastening system. A cushion may be disposed between the openable and/or
removable portion and the electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting
cables thereof). The
cushion can protect the electrical circuitry (e.g., and any connecting cables
thereof) and/or
prevent its movement. Protection can be from light, temperature (e.g., heat or
cold), contact,
humidity, and/or oxygen. The cushion may comprise a polymeric foam (e.g.,
polyurethane).
The cushion may comprise a foam gasket. This cushion may aid in maintaining a
(e.g.,
reasonable) bending radius on the wire(s). The wiring may comprise microflex-
complete
(MXC) cable(s), e.g., to connect the circuitry to the controller (e.g., timing
controller) and/or
power source. The wiring may be coupled to the circuity via one or more
connectors (e.g.,
IPEX or micro connectors). The micro connectors may connect the circuitry
(e.g., disposed
in the fastener) to the display matrix. The circuitry may comprise a booster
board. Micro
connectors can have a plurality of wires, e.g., bonded in an envelope. The
wiring may
comprise coaxial cable(s).
[0130] In some embodiments, the fastener may comprise a regression forming an
opening. The regression may be a secondary opening. The regression may be
centered
about the middle length of the fastener. The regression may or may not be
covered. The
covering of the regression may or may not be reversible. For example, the
covering may be
a secondary hinge leaf. The covering may be bolted to the fastener with
screw(s) and/or
clips. The fastener may comprise two hinge leaves that are coupled with
knuckles and pintle
mechanism to form a hinge. The regression may be covered when the fastener is
in its
closed hinge position. The regression may be (reversibly) covered when the
(primary)
fastener hinge(s) is in its closed position. The regression may be
(reversibly) opened when
the (primary) fastener hinge(s) is in its open position. Fig. 10 shows a cover
17017 that
covers an opening in fastener 1021. The width of the regression (e.g., see
Fig. 41, broken
arrow W
¨ opening) may extend to at most about 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, or
30%
of the hinge leaf width (e.g., see Fig. 41, broken arrow wtOtal) = The
regression may be from
an edge from the hinge leaf towards its internal portion. The regression may
be an opening
withing the hinge leaf (e.g., a window within the hinge leaf), e.g., having
the above
references extension as its width. The length of the opening (e.g.,
regression. E.g., see Fig.
41, broken arrow Lopening) may extend to at most about 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%,
20%, or 10%
of the total length of the hinge leaf (e.g., see Fig. 41, broken arrow
Ltotal). The regression may
extend to a width and/or length that may facilitate connecting and/or
disconnecting any
connectors that couple a circuit board to the display construct and/or touch
screen related
39
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
apparatus (e.g., sensor and emitter panel). The opening (e.g., regression) may
or may not
be centered about a length and/or a width of the fastener (or any hinge leaf
thereof).
[0131] In some embodiments, the controller may comprise a timing
controller (abbreviated
herein as "T-CON"). The timing controller may control operation timing of
various
components of the display matrix (e.g., when a LED is lit up in the display
matrix). The timing
controller can translate between a video signal and a row and a column driver
signaling
required by the display matrix. The media signal may be transmitted to the T-
CON board
over a communication interface such as Low-voltage differential signaling
(LVDS),
Embedded DisplayPort (eDP), Mobile Industry Processor Interface (wpm, Display
Serial
Interface (DS!), or VX1. The circuitry (e.g., chip therein and/or controller)
may comprise a 60
Hz to 120 Hz frame rate converters. The timing controller may refresh a charge
to minimize
optical response decay of the LCD chemical(s) responding to electrical charge,
e.g., at a rate
to keep the signal uniform, avoid decay, and/or adequate update. The
controller (e.g., T-
CON) may be disposed at a distance from the display construct assembly that
includes the
display construct and the fastening system (e.g., fastener).
[0132] In some embodiments, the display construct is operatively
coupled (e.g.,
connected by wiring) to a power supply. The circuitry is operatively coupled
(e.g., connected
by wiring) to a power supply. The connection may be direct or indirect. The
indirect
connection may be through the circuitry (e.g., booster). The power supply may
be a
secondary power supply. The power supply may be coupled to the municipal power
source
(e.g., power plant), and/or building power source (e.g., generator, solar
cell(s), and/or wind
turbine). Power source may be renewable and/or non-renewable. The power source
may be
coupled to the BMS. The power source may be coupled to a network
infrastructure (e.g., as
disclosed herein). The power source may supply power at about 240V or 120V
(e.g., house
current) AC. The secondary power source may comprise a converter reducing the
voltage
(e.g., to at most about 24V, 48V, or 54Volts (V)). Fig. 6 shows an example of
a perspective
view of an assembly 600 including a display construct coupled to a fastener
and a circuitry in
which a fastener 602 (partial view shown) is coupled to a display construct
601 (partial view
shown) that is connected through wiring 603 (partial view shown) to a
circuitry (not shown)
disposed in the fastener, which wiring is secured by hooks such as hook 604.
The hook can
be a tie mount. Fig. 6 shows a perspective view of a hinge leaf 634 to onto
which wiring 633
are connected to, which wiring are connected to a circuitry 632, which hinge
leaf 634 is
joined with hinge leaf portion 635 (partial view shown) and hinge leaf 636
portion that is
connected by a screw 637 to a fixture (not shown). Hinge leaf portions 635 and
636 are part
of the same hinge leaf. Fig. 6 shows a side view example of an assembly 620
including a
fastener 662 coupled with screws, e.g., 661, to a fixture (not shown), which
fixture has
dangling wiring 667 emerging from its body and fastened to a hook 666. The
wiring 667 is
connected (i) to a circuitry (not shown) disposed in the fastener body 662 and
to (ii) a display
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
construct (partial view shown) that includes a display matrix 664 that is
disposed between a
thicker glass 665 and a thinner glass 663. Fig. 6 shows a side view example of
an assembly
612 (similar to 620) disposed in a vertical cross section of a window frame
610. Fig. 6 shows
an example of electrical wiring 630 that can be utilized in the display
construct assembly.
The fastener may comprise a driver and/or booster board. The circuitry may
facilitate data
(e.g., network communication) and/or power transmission.
[0133] The secondary power source may supply a direct current (DC) voltage.
The
secondary power source may be disposed adjacent to the display construct
and/or IGU. The
secondary power source can be disposed in the window frame, in a wall, in a
floor, or in a
ceiling. The controller of the display construct can be disposed separately
from its power
supply. The shortest distance from (i) the display construct, booster board,
driver board,
and/or timing controller (e.g., T-CON) to (ii) the power supply can be at
least about 0.25m,
0.5m, lm, 1.5m, 2m, 2.5m, 3m, 3.5m, 4m, 4.5m, 5m, 5.5m, 6m, 6.5m, 7m, 8m, 10m,
or
20meters (m). The shortest distance from (i) the display construct, booster
board, driver
board, and/or timing controller to (ii) the power supply can be of any value
between the
aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.25 to about 20m, from about 0.25m to
about 5m,
from about 5m to about 7m, or from about 7m to about 20m). For example, the
shortest
distance from (i) the driver and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply
and/or T-CON can
be at least about 1.5m, 2m, 2.5m, 3m, 3.5m, 4m, 4.5m, 5m, 5.5m, 6m, 6.5m, 7m,
8m, or
10m. The shortest distance from (i) the driver and/or booster board to (ii)
the power supply
and/or T-CON can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from
about 1.5
to about 10m, from about 1.5 m to about 5m, or from about 5m to about 10m).
The shortest
distance from (i) the display construct and/or booster board to (ii) the power
supply and/or T-
CON can be of any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5'
to about
30', from about 10' to about 25', or from about 15' to about 20'). For
example, the shortest
distance from (i) the driver board and/or display construct to (ii) the power
supply and/or T-
CON can be at least about 5', 10', 15', 20', 25', 25', 30', 50', 100', 200',
or 300' (feet). The
shortest distance from (i) the display construct, and/or booster board to (ii)
the power supply
and/or timing controller can be of any value between the aforementioned values
(e.g., from
about 5' to about 300', from about 10' to about 25', from about 15' to about
20', from about
20' to about 50', from about 50' to about 200', or from about 100' to about
300').
[0134] In some embodiments, a local controller may control the
viewing (e.g., tintable)
window (e.g., as part of the IGU) and/or the display construct. The local
controller may be
part of a control network. The control network may be a hierarchal control
network (e.g., as
disclosed herein). The hierarchy of the controllers in the control network may
be static or
dynamic. The local controller may be disposed adjacent to the display
construct and/or IGU.
The local controller can be disposed in the window frame, in a wall, in a
floor, or in a ceiling.
In some embodiments, one local controller controls the viewing (e.g.,
tintable) window and
41
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
the display construct (e.g., the media displayed by the display construct). In
some
embodiments, separate controllers control the viewing (e.g., tintable) window
and the display
construct (e.g., the media displayed by the display construct). Communication
between the
local controller and other components of the network interface may be wired
and/or wireless.
The wired communication may include coaxial cable, twisted pair, NM cable,
Underground
Feeder (UF) cable, Thermoplastic High Heat-resistant Nylon-coated (THHN) wire,
Thermoplastic Heat and Water-resistant Nylon-coated (THWN) wire, standard
phone wire, or
category 3 (Cat 3) cable, and/or category 5 (Cat 5) cable. The control system
(e.g., the local
controller) may be communicatively coupled to the display construct (e.g., via
the timing
controller (T-CON)) by wired and/or wireless communication. For example, the
display
construct may be connected to the local controller via one or more wires
and/or wirelessly.
For example, the T-CON may be connected to the local controller via one or
more wires. The
shortest distance from (i) the display construct and/or T-CON to (ii) the
local controller can
be at least about 0.25m, 0.5m, 1m, 1.5m, 2m, 2.5m, 3m, 3.5m, 4m, 4.5m, 5m,
5.5m, 6m,
6.5m, 7m, 8m, lOnneters (m). The shortest distance from (i) the display
construct and/or T-
CON to (ii) the local controller can be of any value between the
aforementioned values (e.g.,
from about 0.25 to about 10m, from about 0.25m to about 5m, from about 5m to
about 7m,
or from about 7m to about 10m). The distance may correspond to a minimal
measure of the
wire length (e.g., when the display construct is communicatively coupled to
the local
controller at least in part via wiring). The shortest distance (I) between the
display construct
and the local controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power
supply, may be
(e.g., substantially) equal. The shortest distance (I) between the display
construct and the
local controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power supply,
may be (e.g.,
substantially) unequal. The shortest distance (I) between the timing
controller and the local
controller, and (II) between the local controller to the power supply, may be
(e.g.,
substantially) equal. For example, the shortest distance (I) between the
timing controller and
the local controller, may be smaller than (II) between the local controller to
the power supply.
For example, the shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the
local controller,
may be longer than (II) between the local controller to the power supply. The
shortest
distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller, and (II)
between the local
controller to the power supply, may be (e.g., substantially) unequal. For
example, the
shortest distance (I) between the timing controller and the local controller,
may be smaller
than (II) between the local controller to the power supply. For example, the
shortest distance
(I) between the timing controller and the local controller, may be larger than
(II) between the
local controller to the power supply.
[0135] Fig. 7 shows an example of a vertical cross section of a display
construct portions
coupled to a circuitry and to a fastener, that includes: an L-bracket 701 is
depicted in cross
section, a circuitry 702 (e.g., a booster board), cable(s) 703, foam gasket
704, screw 705,
42
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
tape 706, first glass pane 707, adhesive (e.g., OCA) 708, display matrix 709,
second glass
pane 710, cover 714, bumper 712, an adhesive 713, and 711 the viewing window
(partial
view shown). The display construct may comprise a flexible bumper (e.g.,
polymer or resin)
that separates it from the window (e.g., 711). The bumper may prevent glass to
glass
contact between the display construct and the window (e.g., tintable window),
which may
lead to damage of the display construct and/or window (e.g., prevent cracks
and/or
breakage). The bumper may increase the safe operation of swiveling the display
construct,
e.g., about the hinge axis. In one embodiment in a cross-section, the L
bracket is defined by
one or more right angle, though the angle could be other than 90 degrees. In
the
embodiment depicted, L-bracket is affixed to a cover glass (e.g., 707) via an
adhesive
element. In embodiments, the adhesive element is an adhesive tape. In one
embodiment,
the adhesive tape comprises a VHB type tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive
element is
a liquid or gel adhesive that bonds the L-bracket to the cover glass. Cover
glass (e.g., 707)
may be plastic, glass or other transparent material. The thickness of the
cover glass in one
example can be about 4nnnn, but it could be thicker or thinner than 4mm. The
cover glass
may be part of the display construct (e.g., transparent display) and/or the
display construct
(e.g., transparent display) element may be laminated to the cover glass. In
the example
shown in Fig. 7, a second cover glass 710 is laminated to a transparent
display element 709,
that is, transparent display element 709 (e.g., a T OLED) is sandwiched
between cover glass
707 and second cover glass 710. The laminate structure formed may rest against
the
viewing window (e.g., 711) or be parallel to but spaced apart from the viewing
window. The
laminate structure comprising the first glass pane 707, the display matrix 709
and the
second glass pane 710 (e.g., second glass cover) may be considered a
transparent display
assembly (also termed herein "display construct").
[0136] In one embodiment, the adhesive element is of sufficient
strength to support a
weight of a transparent display assembly. As depicted, one face of L-bracket
(e.g., 701) is
used as a surface for the adhesive element and at least this much surface area
is attached
to the transparent display assembly, via the cover glass (e.g., 707).
[0137] As depicted in the example shown in Fig 7, a cover 714 is attached to L-
bracket
701. In this example, L-bracket 701 includes an overhang portion on the
vertical leg.
Together with cover 714, a chamber is formed, within which a circuitry 702 for
the display
matrix is housed. Circuitry 702 may be in the form of a circuit board (e.g., a
driver and/or
booster board). In one embodiment the cover seals the electronics from the
environment via
one or more gaskets. In one embodiment, the L-bracket 701 is configured to
provide
movement and/or physical connectivity between a frame of a window and the
display
construct (e.g., see Fig. IA). In one embodiment, circuitry 702 is coupled to
a display matrix
via one or more conductors, e.g., ribbon cable, flex circuit and/or other
wired connections
175. In certain embodiments, wired connections 175 (refer to Fig. 2b) may be
micro-coaxial
43
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
cable (e.g., see 802, Fig. 8). In embodiments, wired connections 802 may
terminate at the L-
bracket with multipin connectors (see Fig. 8, 803).
[0138] In some embodiments, the display construct comprises a touch screen.
The
display construct may comprise at its edges one or more optical sensors to
facilitate
functionality of the touch screen by user(s). The touch screen can receive
contact (e.g.,
touch) input from user(s) and deliver an output response. The response can be
functional
the response can include a change in visual, data, or sound. The touch screen
can utilize the
display matrix. The display construct can be operatively coupled to an
information
processing system (e.g., comprising one or more processors, and/or network
interface).
User(s) can the information processing system through simple (e.g., single) or
multi-
touch gestures by touching the display construct pane facing the user(s).
Touch can be
using a specialized device (e.g., stylus or electronic pen) or one or any
portion of their body
(e.g., more fingers). The specialized device may be adapted to the display
construct. The
touchscreen can be a resistive touchscreen, surface acoustic wave touchscreen
(e.g., using
ultrasonic waves), capacitive touchscreen, infrared grid touchscreen (e.g.,
using
photodetectors), optical imaging (e.g., using CMOS sensors), infrared acrylic
projection (e.g.,
comprising infrared LEDs), dispersive signal touchscreen, or acoustic pulse
recognition
touchscreen. The display construct is enhanced per requirements of the touch
screen
technology. For example, when sensors (e.g., COMS) and/or projectors (e.g.,
LEDs) are
required for the touch screen, those are added to the display construct, e.g.,
by placing them
inside a frame surrounding at least a portion of the display construct.
[0139] In some embodiments, the display construct can act as a touch screen. A
frame
may comprise one or more sensors disposed on or in the frame. The frame may
include a
circuitry, one or more connectors (e.g., to power supply and/or network
system), and any
optical component (e.g., reflector, mirror, prism, beam splitter, and/or
lens). The sensors
may be configured to detect a presence and position of a user's finger,
stylus, marker, smart
pen, and/or other marking and/or indicating device within an area bounded by
the frame
shape (e.g., an area spanned by a surface of a transparent display assembly).
Sensors may
be disposed along and/or within lengths of one or more frame portions (e.g.,
within a channel
defined by one or more frame portion). One or more frame portions may comprise
sensors,
circuits, and/or connections. The one or more frame portions may include at
least 1, 2, 3, or
4 frame portions (e.g., 1012, 1019, and 1020). The frame portion may be a
bezel. The frame
portion may comprise a groove. The frame portion may be configured to hold the
display
construct. The width of the frame portion groove may be configured to
accommodate the
width of the display construct. In some embodiments, all edges (e.g., sides)
of the display
construct may comprise touch screen frames. Circuits may process signals from
sensors
and output signals representative of a location of a marking or indicating
device within an
area bounded by a frame. A frame may comprise connections to other circuits,
including
44
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
circuits disposed on, or coupled to, the transparent display assembly (e.g.,
circuits on L-
bracket). Circuits may comprise but are not limited to, one or more of:
processor, memory,
display, analog and/or digital circuits.
[0140] A frame may provide a transparent display assembly with interactive
display
functionality (e.g., white board functionality). A fixed or moving location of
a user's finger or
indicating device against a transparent display may be sensed by sensors of a
frame within
an area bounded by the frame, and signals representative of the location may
be generated
by circuits of the frame. Signals representative of a location within an area
bounded by a
frame may comprise signals compatible with display technology of a display. In
some
embodiments, signals representative of a location within an area bounded by a
frame
comprise, but are not limited to, universal serial bus (USB) and/or high
definition multimedia
interface (HDMI) signals. Signals representative of a fixed or moving location
of a user's
finger or indicating device within an area of a frame may be processed by
software and/or
circuits associated with the frame and/or transparent frame assembly. The
processed
signals may be displayed on a transparent display assembly, e.g., in the form
of a
representation of the fixed or moving location (e.g., as writing, printing, a
shape). Software
associated with the frame and/or transparent display may be configured to
provide other
functionality, including, but not limited to, (i) display of a sensed location
of a user's finger, or
other indicating device, on another display or device, (ii) interaction with
the transparent
display and frame by more than one user, (iii) export of displayed content,
(iv) import of
display content, (v) erase of displayed content, and/or (vi) selection of
display colors. In one
embodiment, a frame may comprise one or more commercially available touch
screens (e.g.,
from FlatFrog USA Inc. 333 West San Carlos Street, San Jose CA 95110).
[0141] Fig. 10 shows an example of a display construct 1010, components of a
fastener
that includes leaf 1021, primary hinges 1018 and 1015 that allow swiveling of
the display
construct about their axis, secondary hinge (including portion 1017) that
facilitates exposure
of a portion of circuitry 1016 (e.g., of a booster board and/or driver board).
Leaf 1021 has an
opening that facilitates accessing the circuity 1016 through the opening
covered by hinge
leaf 1017. Display construct 1010 is framed by touch screen sensor array 1013
and
protective covers 1012 and 1019 that cover the sensor array in a protective
framing. Display
construct 1050 shows a touch screen sensor array covered and assembled 1052
with the
display construct 1050, and well as an assembled fastener 1056. In some
examples, the
secondary hinge (e.g., 1017) is absent (e.g., as in example 3504). In some
embodiments,
the fastener (including the primary hinge) has an opening through which at
least a portion of
the circuitry (e.g., PCB) is viewable and/or accessible. For example, at least
some of the
connectors in the circuitry can be viewable and/or accessible through the
opening. For
example, at least some of the connectors between the circuitry and the display
construct can
be viewable and/or accessible through the opening (e.g., see Fig. 35 opening
3504 allowing
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
viewing of connectors 3509 attached to circuitry 3530 (e.g., comprising the
booster and/or
driver board)).
[0142] In one embodiment, a fastener comprises one or more portion that is
configured to
provide physical connectivity of the transparent display to a window (e.g., a
hinge). In one
embodiment, one or more portion of a fastener is configured to provide
movement between
the transparent display and a lite of a window (e.g., using a hinge of the
fastener).
[0143] With reference to Fig. 4, in one embodiment, L-bracket comprises one or
hinges,
e.g., hinge 400. In one embodiment, the hinge comprises a plurality of
elongated holes or
slots. In one embodiment, an axis of elongation of at least one of the
plurality of holes is
orthogonal to an axis of elongation of at least one other of the plurality of
holes. This allows
for a method of installation of the transparent display assembly to the window
frame. For
example, one or more hinges (e.g., 400) are mounted to the window frame via
holes that
provide a distance at which the transparent display assembly will be from the
window (e.g.,
711). Prior to its mounting, L-bracket (e.g., 701), pre-mounted to the
transparent display
assembly, can be affixed to the other leg of the one or more hinges (e.g.,
400), which
provides, via the other plurality of holes, orthogonal to those on the other
leg of the hinge,
centering the L-bracket/transparent display element within the viewable area
of the window,
between the framing elements.
[0144] With reference to Fig. 7, in one embodiment, one or more hinges having
a joint 750
that connects a first hinge leaf 752 and a second hinge leaf 753 shown in a
closed position
791. The open position is shown in 720, in which the dotted arrow 790
indicated the relative
movement of the first hinge leaf can be termed herein as "first leg," and the
second hinge
leaf may be termed herein as a "second leg." The first leg can be coupled to
or comprises
the bracket. The fastener comprising the hinge leaves 752 and 753 is coupled
to a display
construct 754 (partial view shown), and to a window 751(partial view shown).
The second
leg can be coupled to a window frame 755. In one embodiment, one or hinges are
configured to enable movement of a transparent display assembly away or toward
the
viewing window. In one embodiment the movement is rotational about a
longitudinal axis, i.e.
a pivot. In one embodiment, during a movement of a transparent display
relative to a viewing
window, no movement of the transparent display assembly occurs relative to
circuitry 757
(e.g., booster and/or driver board), conductors 758 such as a ribbon cable
and/or other
wiring elements used to couple the transparent display to the circuitry. Fig.
7 shows an
example of a display construct 784 (partial view shown) coupled to a first
hinge leaf 782. The
hinge leaf 782 is joined by joint 780 to the second hinge leaf 783 that is
coupled to cover 785
that is coupled to a window frame for window 781 (partial view shown).
[0145] This configuration provides for longer life to the
electrical connections between the
display and the controller (e.g., T-CON), because the connections are not
subject to the
46
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
movement and friction associated with movement of the transparent display and
fastener
(e.g., bracket) assembly.
[0146]
Referring to Fig. 8, in one embodiment, a seal is provided along at least
3 edges of
a transparent display assembly, e.g., along the edge of a laminate assembly as
described
herein. In embodiments, the seal is in the form of a silicone or other
transparent plastic,
resin, or other polymer cap (or bumper) that fits over the laminate
transparent assembly
edges, sealing the unit. The seal may provide a bumper function between the
second cover
glass (e.g., fig. 7, 710) and the window (e.g., fig. 7, 711). Fig. 8 shows an
example of a
perspective view of display construct 850 and a seal that is applied according
to arrows 811,
812, and 813 along three sides of display construct 850, e.g., by use of an
applicator (e.g.,
syringe gun) 810. Display construct 850 is coupled to fastener 530 onto which
wires 802
connect a display matrix in the display construct, with a circuitry disposed
in the fastener
(now shown). The display construct 850 is shown in the example of Fig. 8 also
as a vertical
cross section 830 of a portion of a display construct that includes a thicker
supportive
structure (e.g., glass pane) 804 , a thinner supportive structure (e.g., glass
pane) 805,
adhesive layers 806 and 808, a display matrix 807, and a seal 809. The seal
may protrude
from the supportive structures (e.g., glass panes) and/or serve as a bumper.
The protrusion
of the seal may be random, or directional. For example, the protrusion may be
directed
towards one side of the display construct (e.g., that is destined to touch the
window). The
protrusion of the seal may be (e.g., substantially) uniform or non-uniform
(e.g., towards one
side of the display construct).
[0147] Fig. 9 shows an example of a cover 903 (shown in cross section) that
may be used
to conceal L-bracket 904 from view. Cover 903 may be removably attached to
window frame
905. Power and communications may be delivered to the transparent display
assembly via
wires 906, in this example housed within window frame 905. L-bracket may allow
servicing
of the transparent display or replacement, and/or servicing or replacement of
any circuitry
(e.g., disposed in a fastener of which the bracket is a part of). Fig. 9 shows
an example of a
transparent display assembly having a display construct including (e.g.,
glass) pane 907,
display matrix 908, and (e.g., glass) pane 902, which display construct is
coupled to, or be
comprised of, a frame 905. A frame may comprise portions coupled, or
configured to be
coupled, to each other. A frame may comprise at least three (3) portions. A
frame may
comprise a shape that (e.g., approximates) matches a shape of at least a
portion of a
periphery of a display construct (e.g., transparent display assembly). A frame
may be
coupled or attached to sides (or to edges) of a display construct (e.g.,
transparent display
assembly). In one embodiment, frame portions are coupled to each other to form
a frame
shape, e.g., after the frame portions have been coupled to a display construct
(e.g.,
transparent display assembly). In one embodiment, frame portions may be
coupled to each
other to form a frame shape, e.g., before the frame portions are coupled to a
display
47
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
construct (e.g., transparent display assembly). A display construct (e.g.,
transparent display
assembly) may be positioned within an area bounded by the frame shape. Frame
portions
may comprise channels (e.g., U-shaped channels) configured to receive and/or
retain sides
of a transparent display assembly therein.
[0148] Fig. 9 shows an example of a window frame (e.g., a mullion) portion 951
to which a
fastener is attached 953 (which fastener includes a hinge/lock 952). Fastener
953 is coupled
to a display construct 954 (partial view shown) and to an integrated glass
unit 961 (IGU)
(partial view shown) that includes: a first pane 955, an enclosed environment
957, a second
pane 956, and an electrochromic construct 958 disposed on pane 956. The
enclosed
environment in the IGU can be an insulated, (e.g., hermitically) sealed,
and/or inert
environment. Fig. 9 shows an example of a power source unit and/or controller
(e.g., timing
controller) that are collectively designated as numeral 959, disposed in the
frame portion
951, and electrical wiring and/or communication pathways 960 that travel from
an
environment external to the window frame 951 to the display construct 954. The
electrical
wiring and/or communication pathways can travel through the window frame to
the IGU. The
electrical wiring and/or communication pathways can travel to the IGU through
the controller
and/or power source assembly. The pane can be of a transparent hard material
(e.g., glass
or polymeric such as plastic). Transparent can be at least in the wavelengths
sensitive to an
average human viewer.
[0149] The present invention should not be limited by the embodiments, aspects
and
advantages disclosed above as other embodiments, aspects and advantages are
within its
scope, including one or more of those that follow. In one embodiment, the
present invention
comprises a structure (e.g., a fastener), wherein the structure (e.g.,
fastener) is comprised of
a first portion and a second portion, the first and second portion configured
to move relative
to each other. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one or more bracket.
In one
embodiment, the structure comprises one or more hinge. In one embodiment, the
structure
comprises one or more electrical connector. In one embodiment, the electrical
connector
comprises a micro-coax cable. In one embodiment, the electrical connector
comprises one
or more ribbon cable. In one embodiment the structure is configured to be
mounted to a
display construct (e.g., comprising transparent display). In one embodiment,
the transparent
display is a T. OLED display. In one embodiment, the display construct (e.g.,
including the
transparent display) comprises one or more optically clear glass, hardened
polymer (e.g.,
plastic), or a hardened resin. In one embodiment, the structure comprises one
or more
electronic circuit configured to communicate with the display matrix (e.g.,
transparent display
matrix). In one embodiment, the structure is configured to mount to a frame.
In one
embodiment, the frame comprises a window frame. In one embodiment, the
structure is
configured to be mounted to a FLS (e.g., a length) of the transparent display.
In one
embodiment, the structure comprises a length, wherein the length is from about
0.1 feet to
48
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
about 10 feet. In one embodiment, a first portion of the fastener comprises at
least one
bracket and the second portion of the fastener comprises one or more hinges.
In one
embodiment, the structure comprises a display matrix, and an adhesive element,
wherein
the display matrix is mounted to the first portion and/or to second portion,
e.g., via the
adhesive element. In one embodiment, the adhesive elements comprise an
adhesive tape.
In one embodiment, the adhesive tape comprises VHB tape. In one embodiment,
the first
portion of the fastener and/or second portion of the fastener is configured to
be mounted to a
viewing window (e.g., tintable window). In one embodiment, the first portion
of the fastener is
configured to be mounted to a display construct and the second portion is
configured to be
mounted to a window (wherein the second portion comprise a hinge). In one
embodiment,
the hinge comprises a plurality of elongated holes, wherein an axis of
elongation of at least
one of the plurality of holes is orthogonal to an axis of elongation of at
least one other of the
plurality of holes.
[0150] In one embodiment, the present invention comprises a frame. The frame
can be
comprised of a transparent display and a fastener (comprising a bracket)
configured to
provide movement and physical connectivity between the frame and the display
construct
(e.g., comprising the transparent display). In one embodiment, the frame
comprises a
window frame. In one embodiment the bracket comprises an L-bracket, wherein
the L-
bracket is coupled to the frame and to the display construct (e.g., comprising
the transparent
display). In one embodiment, the bracket is coupled to the transparent display
via an
adhesive structure. In one embodiment, the adhesive structure comprises
adhesive tape. In
one embodiment, the bracket comprises one or more hinge. In one embodiment,
the hinge is
configured to provide the movement of the display construct (e.g., comprising
the
transparent display) relative to a fixture (e.g., window frame). In one
embodiment, the
movement comprises rotational movement. In one embodiment, the movement is
about a
horizontal axis. In one embodiment, the movement is about a vertical axis. In
one
embodiment, the frame comprises a lite (e.g., a windowpane). In one
embodiment, the
bracket is configured to move a face of the transparent display close to or
against a face of
the lite. In one embodiment, the frame defines an interior area (e.g., that is
a surface of the
window in the frame), wherein the transparent display comprises a height and a
width that
defines an area that fits within the interior area. In one embodiment, the
area of the display
construct (e.g., comprising the transparent display) fits (e.g.,
substantially) within all the
interior area. In one embodiment, the area of the transparent display fits
within one half or
less than one half of the interior area. In one embodiment, the structure
comprises one or
more conductor, ribbon cable and/or connector, and the one or more conductor,
ribbon cable
and/or connector provides electrical connectivity between a control and the
transparent
display.
49
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0151] In some embodiments, an assembly having a display construct and a
fastener is
formed. The display construct can be adhered to at least a component of the
fastener, e.g., a
bracket. Fig. 11 shows an example of stage in construction an assembly of a
display
construct and a fastener. In 1110, a display construct 1112 has an area 1112
designated for
adhesive application. In 1120, an adhesive is applied on the adhesive
designated area
according to arrows the arrows, e.g., 1121. In 1130, a fastener 1131 (e.g., L
bracket) is
placed on the adhesive designated area having an applied adhesive placed
thereon. Items
1121, 1131, and 1112 show portions of display constructs. The fastener and the
display
construct can be disposed in the same plane or in different planes. At least a
portion of the
fastener can be disposed in the same plane or in different planes relative to
the display
construct. The display construct can be coupled at an angle to the fastener
(e.g., as shown
in Fig. 12, 1210). The display construct and the fastener can form one plane
(e.g., as shown
in 1220). Fig 12 shows an example of display construct 1211 forming an angle
with fastener
1218, and display construct 1221 forming a planar plane with fastener 1228.
The display
construct may comprise irradiating entities (e.g., LEDs) that irradiate more
in one direction
than in another (e.g., more in a forward direction than in a back direction).
An image
displayed by a display matrix may be visible clearly from one side of the
display matrix than
from its opposing side. The display construct may comprise two display
matrices of
irradiating entities (e.g., LED matrices) disposed back to back. The at least
one (e.g., each)
of the two display matrices may be disposed with its more irradiating side
facing away from
the back (and towards a viewer), and its less irradiating side facing the back
(and away from
the viewer). The back to back arrangement of the display matrices in the
display construct
may facilitate clear image viewing from both sides of the display construct. A
display
construct having back to back display matrices may utilize a flat fasteners
(e.g., 1228). In
some embodiments, two display constructs may be disposed adjacent to each
other in a
back to back configuration, e.g., such that at least one (e.g., each) of the
display constructs
may have its more illuminating side facing away from the back (and towards a
viewer), and
its less irradiating side facing the back (and away from the viewer). The two
back to back
display constructs may utilize a flat fastener (e.g., 1228) to fasten both
display constructs to
a structure (e.g., fixture).
[0152] In some embodiments, the window is disposed in an enclosure. In some
embodiments, an enclosure comprises an area defined by at least one structure.
The at
least one structure may comprise at least one wall. An enclosure may comprise
and/or
enclose one or more sub-enclosure. The at least one wall may comprise metal
(e.g., steel),
clay, stone, plastic, glass, plaster (e.g., gypsum), polymer (e.g.,
polyurethane, styrene, or
vinyl), asbestos, fiber-glass, concrete (e.g., reinforced concrete), wood,
paper, or a ceramic.
The at least one wall may comprise wire, bricks, blocks (e.g., cinder blocks),
tile, drywall, or
frame (e.g., steel frame).
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0153] In some embodiments, the enclosure comprises one or more openings. The
one or
more openings may be reversibly closable. The one or more openings may be
permanently
open. A fundamental length scale of the one or more openings may be smaller
relative to the
fundamental length scale of the wall(s) that define the enclosure. A
fundamental length scale
may comprise a diameter of a bounding circle, a length, a width, or a height.
A surface of the
one or more openings may be smaller relative to the surface the wall(s) that
define the
enclosure. The opening surface may be a percentage of the total surface of the
wall(s). For
example, the opening surface can measure at most about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or
1% of the
walls(s). The wall(s) may comprise a floor, a ceiling, or a side wall. The
closable opening
may be closed by at least one window or door. The enclosure may be at least a
portion of a
facility. The facility may comprise a building. The enclosure may comprise at
least a portion
of a building. The building may be a private building and/or a commercial
building. The
building may comprise one or more floors. The building (e.g., floor thereof)
may include at
least one of: a room, hall, foyer, attic, basement, balcony (e.g., inner or
outer balcony),
stairwell, corridor, elevator shaft, façade, mezzanine, penthouse, garage,
porch (e.g.,
enclosed porch), terrace (e.g., enclosed terrace), cafeteria, and/or Duct. In
some
embodiments, an enclosure may be stationary and/or movable (e.g., a train, an
airplane, a
ship, a vehicle, or a rocket).
[0154] In some embodiments, the enclosure encloses an atmosphere. The
atmosphere
may comprise one or more gases. The gases may include inert gases (e.g.,
comprising
argon or nitrogen) and/or non-inert gases (e.g., comprising oxygen or carbon
dioxide). The
enclosure atmosphere may resemble an atmosphere external to the enclosure
(e.g., ambient
atmosphere) in at least one external atmosphere characteristic that includes:
temperature,
relative gas content, gas type (e.g., humidity, and/or oxygen level), debris
(e.g., dust and/or
pollen), and/or gas velocity. The enclosure atmosphere may be different from
the
atmosphere external to the enclosure in at least one external atmosphere
characteristic that
includes: temperature, relative gas content, gas type (e.g., humidity, and/or
oxygen level),
debris (e.g., dust and/or pollen), and/or gas velocity. For example, the
enclosure atmosphere
may be less humid (e.g., drier) than the external (e.g., ambient) atmosphere.
For example,
the enclosure atmosphere may contain the same (e.g., or a substantially
similar) oxygen-to-
nitrogen ratio as the atmosphere external to the enclosure. The velocity of
the gas in the
enclosure may be (e.g., substantially) similar throughout the enclosure. The
velocity of the
gas in the enclosure may be different in different portions of the enclosure
(e.g., by flowing
gas through to a vent that is coupled with the enclosure).
[0155] Certain disclosed embodiments provide a network infrastructure in the
enclosure
(e.g., a facility such as a building). The network infrastructure is available
for various
purposes such as for providing communication and/or power services. The
communication
services may comprise high bandwidth (e.g., wireless and/or wired)
communications
51
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
services. The communication services can be to occupants of a facility and/or
users outside
the facility (e.g., building). The network infrastructure may work in concert
with, or as a
partial replacement of, the infrastructure of one or more cellular carriers.
The network
infrastructure can be provided in a facility that includes electrically
switchable windows.
Examples of components of the network infrastructure include a high speed
backhaul. The
network infrastructure may include at least one cable, switch, physical
antenna, transceivers,
sensor, transmitter, receiver, radio, processor and/or controller (that may
comprise a
processor). The network infrastructure may be operatively coupled to, and/or
include, a
wireless network. The network infrastructure may comprise wiring. One or more
sensors can
be deployed (e.g., installed) in an environment as part of installing the
network and/or after
installing the network. The network infrastructure may be configured to
facilitate at least third
generation (3G), fourth generation (4G), or fifth generation (5G) cellular
communication. The
network may be configured to facilitate media transmission (e.g.,
presentation, still, or video
(e.g., movie, and/or advertisement) transmission). The network may be
configured for
simultaneous data and power communication (e.g., on the same cable such as a
coaxial
cable). The network may be a local network. The network may comprise a cable
configured
to transmit power and communication in a single cable. The communication can
be one or
more types of communication. The communication can comprise cellular
communication
abiding by at least a second generation (2G), third generation (3G), fourth
generation (4G) or
fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocol. The communication may
comprise
media communication facilitating stills, music, or moving picture streams
(e.g., movies or
videos). The communication may comprise data communication (e.g., sensor
data). The
communication may comprise control communication, e.g., to control the one or
more nodes
operatively coupled to the networks. The network may comprise a first (e.g.,
cabling)
network installed in the facility. The network may comprise a (e.g., cabling)
network installed
in an envelope of the facility (e.g., such as in an envelope of an enclosure
of the facility. For
example, in an envelope of a building included in the facility).
[0156]
In some embodiments, the present disclosure provides a network that is
configured
for transmission of any communication (e.g., signal) and/or (e.g., electrical)
power facilitating
any of the operations disclosed herein. The communication may comprise control
communication, cellular communication, media communication, and/or data
communication.
The data communication may comprise sensor data communication and/or processed
data
communication. The networks may be configured to abide by one or more
protocols
facilitating such communication. For example, a communications protocol used
by the
network (e.g., with a BMS) can comprise a building automation and control
networks
protocol (BACnet). The network may be configured for (e.g., include hardware
facilitating)
communication protocols comprising BACnet (e.g., BACnet/SC), LonWorks, Modbus,
KNX,
European Home Systems Protocol (EHS), BatiBUS, European Installation Bus (EIB
or
52
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
Instabus), zigbee, Z-wave, Insteon, X10, Bluetooth, or WiFi. The network may
be configure
to transmit the control related protocol. A communication protocol may
facilitate cellular
communication abiding by at least a 2n1, 31d, 4th, or 5th generation cellular
communication
protocol. The (e.g., cabling) network may comprise a tree, line, or star
topologies. The
network may comprise interworking and/or distributed application models for
various tasks of
the building automation. The control system may provide schemes for
configuration and/or
management of resources on the network. The network may permit binding of
parts of a
distributed application in different nodes operatively coupled to the network.
The network
may provide a communication system with a message protocol and models for the
communication stack in each node (capable of hosting distributed applications
(e.g., having
a common Kernel). The control system may comprise programmable logic
controller(s)
(PLC(s)).
[0157] In some embodiments, an enclosure includes one or more sensors. The
sensor
may facilitate controlling the environment of the enclosure such that
inhabitants of the
enclosure may have an environment that is more comfortable, delightful,
beautiful, healthy,
productive (e.g., in terms of inhabitant performance), easer to live (e.g.,
work) in, or any
combination thereof. The sensor(s) may be configured as low or high resolution
sensors.
Sensor may provide on/off indications of the occurrence and/or presence of a
particular
environmental event (e.g., one pixel sensors).
[0158] In various embodiments, a network infrastructure supports a
control system for one
or more viewing windows such as electrochromic (e.g., tintable) windows. The
control
system may comprise one or more controllers operatively coupled (e.g.,
directly or indirectly)
to one or more windows. In some embodiments, electrochromic window is an
example of
optically switchable windows, tintable windows, and/or smart windows. The
concepts
disclosed herein may apply to other types of switchable optical devices
including, for
example, a liquid crystal device, or a suspended particle device. For example,
a liquid crystal
device and/or a suspended particle device may be implemented instead of, or in
addition to,
an electrochromic device.
[0159] In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (e.g.,
controllable and/or
reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, e.g., when
a stimulus is
applied. The stimulus can include an optical, electrical and/or magnetic
stimulus. For
example, the stimulus can include an applied voltage. One or more tintable
windows can be
used to control lighting and/or glare conditions, e.g., by regulating the
transmission of solar
energy propagating through them. One or more tintable windows can be used to
control a
temperature within a building, e.g., by regulating the transmission of solar
energy
propagating through them. Control of the solar energy may control heat load
imposed on the
interior of the facility (e.g., building). The control may be manual and/or
automatic. The
control may be used for maintaining one or more requested (e.g.,
environmental) conditions,
53
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
e.g., occupant comfort. The control may include reducing energy consumption of
a heating,
ventilation, air conditioning and/or lighting systems. At least two of
heating, ventilation, and
air conditioning may be induced by separate systems. At least two of heating,
ventilation,
and air conditioning may be induced by one system. The heating, ventilation,
and air
conditioning may be induced by a single system (abbreviated herein as "HVAC).
In some
cases, tintable windows may be responsive to (e.g., and communicatively
coupled to) one or
more environmental sensors and/or user control. Tintable windows may comprise
(e.g., may
be) electrochromic windows. The windows may be located in the range from the
interior to
the exterior of a structure (e.g., facility, e.g., building). However, this
need not be the case.
Tintable windows may operate using liquid crystal devices, suspended particle
devices,
microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) devices (such as micro shutters), or any
technology configured to control light transmission through a window. Windows
(e.g., with
MEMS devices for tinting) are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
14/443,353,
filed May 15, 2015, titled "MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC
DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES," that is incorporated herein
by reference in its entirety. In some cases, one or more viewing (e.g.,
tintable) windows can
be located within the interior of a building, e.g., between a conference room
and a hallway.
In some cases, one or more viewing (e.g., tintable) windows can be used in
automobiles,
trains, aircraft, and other vehicles, e.g., in lieu of a passive and/or non-
tinting window.
[0160] In some embodiments, the tintable window comprises an electrochromic
device
(referred to herein as an "EC device" (abbreviated herein as ECD), or "EC").
An EC device
may comprise at least one coating that includes at least one layer. The at
least one layer can
comprise an electrochromic material. In some embodiments, the electrochromic
material
exhibits a change from one optical state to another, e.g., when an electric
potential is applied
across the EC device. The transition of the electrochromic layer from one
optical state to
another optical state can be caused, e.g., by reversible, semi-reversible, or
irreversible ion
insertion into the electrochromic material (e.g., by way of intercalation) and
a corresponding
injection of charge-balancing electrons. For example, the transition of the
electrochromic
layer from one optical state to another optical state can be caused, e.g., by
a reversible ion
insertion into the electrochromic material (e.g., by way of intercalation) and
a corresponding
injection of charge-balancing electrons. Reversible may be for the expected
lifetime of the
ECD. Semi-reversible refers to a measurable (e.g., noticeable) degradation in
the
reversibility of the tint of the window over one or more tinting cycles. In
some instances, a
fraction of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly
bound up in the
electrochromic material (e.g., and thus the induced (altered) tint state of
the window is not
reversible to its original tinting state). In various EC devices, at least
some (e.g., all) of the
irreversibly bound ions can be used to compensate for "blind charge" in the
material (e.g.,
ECD).
54
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0161] In some implementations, suitable ions include cations. The
cations may include
lithium ions (Li+) and/or hydrogen ions (H+) (i.e., protons). In some
implementations, other
ions can be suitable. Intercalation of the cations may be into an (e.g.,
metal) oxide. A change
in the intercalation state of the ions (e.g., cations) into the oxide may
induce a visible change
in a tint (e.g., color) of the oxide. For example, the oxide may transition
from a colorless to a
colored state. For example, intercalation of lithium ions into tungsten oxide
(W03-y (0 <y
¨0.3)) may cause the tungsten oxide to change from a transparent state to a
colored (e.g.,
blue) state. EC device coatings as described herein are located within the
viewable portion
of the tintable window such that the tinting of the EC device coating can be
used to control
the optical state of the tintable window.
[0162] Fig. 13 shows an example of a schematic cross-section of an
electrochromic
construct 1300 in accordance with some embodiments. The EC device coating is
attached to
a substrate 1302, a transparent conductive layer (TCL) 1304, an electrochromic
layer (EC)
1306 (sometimes also referred to as a cathodically coloring layer or a
cathodically tinting
layer), an ion conducting layer or region (IC) 1308, a counter electrode layer
(CE) 1310
(sometimes also referred to as an anodically coloring layer or anodically
tinting layer), and a
second TCL 1314. Elements 1304, 1306, 1308, 1310, and 1314 are collectively
referred to
as an electrochromic stack 120. A voltage source 1316 operable to apply an
electric
potential across the electrochromic stack 1320 effects the transition of the
electrochromic
coating from, e.g., a clear state to a tinted state. In other embodiments, the
order of layers is
reversed with respect to the substrate. That is, the layers are in the
following order:
substrate, TCL, counter electrode layer, ion conducting layer, electrochromic
material layer,
TCL.
[0163] In various embodiments, the ion conductor region (e.g.,
1308) may form from a
portion of the EC layer (e.g., 1306) and/or from a portion of the CE layer
(e.g., 1310). In such
embodiments, the electrochromic stack (e.g., 1320) may be deposited to include
cathodically
coloring electrochromic material (the EC layer) in direct physical contact
with an anodically
coloring counter electrode material (the CE layer). The ion conductor region
(sometimes
referred to as an interfacial region, or as an ion conducting substantially
electronically
insulating layer or region) may form where the EC layer and the CE layer meet,
for example
through heating and/or other processing steps. Examples of electrochromic
devices (e.g.,
including those fabricated without depositing a distinct ion conductor
material) can be found
in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 13/462,725, filed May 2, 2012, titled
"ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES," that is incorporated herein by reference in its
entirety. In
some embodiments, an EC device coating may include one or more additional
layers such
as one or more passive layers. Passive layers can be used to improve certain
optical
properties, to provide moisture, and/or to provide scratch resistance. These
and/or other
passive layers can serve to hermetically seal the EC stack 120. Various
layers, including
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
transparent conducting layers (such as 1304 and 1314), can be treated with
anti-reflective
and/or protective layers (e.g., oxide and/or nitride layers).
[0164] In certain embodiments, the electrochromic device is
configured to (e.g.,
substantially) reversibly cycle between a clear state and a tinted state.
Reversible may be
within an expected lifetime of the ECD. The expected lifetime can be at least
about 2y, 5y,
by, 15y, 25y, 50y, 75y, or 100 (y) years. The expected lifetime can be any
value between
the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 5 y to about 100 y, from about 2 y
to about 25 y,
from about 25 y to about 50 y, or from about 50 y to about 100 y). A potential
can be applied
to the electrochromic stack (e.g., 1320) such that available ions in the stack
that can cause
the electrochromic material (e.g., 1306) to be in the tinted state reside
primarily in the
counter electrode (e.g., 1310) when the window is in a first tint state (e.g.,
clear). When the
potential applied to the electrochromic stack is reversed, the ions can be
transported across
the ion conducting layer (e.g., 1308) to the electrochromic material and cause
the material to
enter the second tint state (e.g., tinted state).
[0165] It should be understood that the reference to a transition
between a clear state and
tinted state is non-limiting and suggests only one example, among many, of an
electrochromic transition that may be implemented. Unless otherwise specified
herein,
whenever reference is made to a clear-tinted transition, the corresponding
device or process
encompasses other optical state transitions such as non-reflective-reflective,
and/or
transparent-opaque. In some embodiments, the terms "clear" and "bleached"
refer to an
optically neutral state, e.g., untinted, transparent and/or translucent. In
some embodiments,
the "color" or "tint" of an electrochromic transition is not limited to any
wavelength or range of
wavelengths. The choice of appropriate electrochromic material and counter
electrode
materials may govern the relevant optical transition (e.g., from tinted to
untinted state).
[0166] In certain embodiments, at least a portion (e.g., all of)
the materials making up
electrochromic stack are inorganic, solid (e.g., in the solid state), or both
inorganic and solid.
Because various organic materials tend to degrade over time, particularly when
exposed to
heat and UV light as tinted building windows are, inorganic materials offer an
advantage of a
reliable electrochromic stack that can function for extended periods of time.
In some
embodiments, materials in the solid state can offer the advantage of being
minimally
contaminated and minimizing leakage issues, as materials in the liquid state
sometimes do.
One or more of the layers in the stack may contain some amount of organic
material (e.g.,
that is measurable). The ECD or any portion thereof (e.g., one or more of the
layers) may
contain little or no measurable organic matter. The ECD or any portion thereof
(e.g., one or
more of the layers) may contain one or more liquids that may be present in
little amounts.
Little may be of at most about 100ppm, 1Oppm, or 1ppm of the ECD. Solid state
material
may be deposited (or otherwise formed) using one or more processes employing
liquid
56
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
components, such as certain processes employing sol-gels, physical vapor
deposition,
and/or chemical vapor deposition.
[0167] Figs. 14 show an example of a cross-sectional view of a tintable window
embodied
in an insulated glass unit ("IGU") 1400, in accordance with some
implementations. It can be
desirable to have IGUs serve as the fundamental constructs for holding
electrochromic
panes (also referred to herein as "lites" and in the singular "lite") when
provided for
installation in a building. An IGU lite may be a single substrate or a multi-
substrate construct.
The lite may comprise a laminate, e.g., of two substrates. IGUs (e.g., having
double- or
triple-pane configurations) can provide a number of advantages over single
pane
configurations. For example, multi-pane configurations can provide enhanced
thermal
insulation, noise insulation, environmental protection and/or durability, when
compared with
single-pane configurations. A multi-pane configuration can provide increased
protection for
an ECD. For example, the electrochromic films (e.g., as well as associated
layers and
conductive interconnects) can be formed on an interior surface of the multi-
pane IGU and be
protected by an inert gas fill in the interior volume (e.g., 1408) of the IGU.
The inert gas fill
may provide at least some (heat) insulating function for an IGU.
Electrochromic IGUs may
have heat blocking capability, e.g., by virtue of a tintable coating that
absorbs (and/or
reflects) heat and light.
[0168] In some embodiments, an "IGU" includes two (or more)
substantially transparent
substrates. For example, the IGU may include two panes of glass. At least one
substrate of
the IGU can include an electrochromic device disposed thereon. The one or more
panes of
the IGU may have a separator disposed between them. An IGU can be a
hermetically sealed
construct, e.g., having an interior region that is isolated from the ambient
environment. A
"window assembly" may include an IGU. A "window assembly" may include a (e.g.,
stand-
alone) laminate. A "window assembly" may include one or more electrical leads,
e.g., for
connecting the IGUs and/or laminates. The electrical leads may operatively
couple (e.g.,
connect) one or more electrochromic devices to a voltage source, switches and
the like, and
may include a frame that supports the IGU or laminate. A window assembly may
include a
window controller, and/or components of a window controller (e.g., a dock).
[0169] Fig. 14 shows an example implementation of an IGU 1400 that includes a
first
pane 1404 having a first surface S1 and a second surface S2. In some
implementations, the
first surface Si of the first pane 1404 faces an exterior environment, such as
an outdoors or
outside environment. The IGU 200 also includes a second pane 1406 having a
first surface
S3 and a second surface S4. In some implementations, the second surface (e.g.,
S4) of the
second pane (e.g., 1406) faces an interior environment, such as an inside
environment of a
home, building, vehicle, or compartment thereof (e.g., an enclosure therein
such as a room).
[0170] In some implementations, the first and the second panes
(e.g., 1404 and 1406) are
transparent or translucent, e.g., at least to light in the visible spectrum.
For example, each of
57
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
the panes (e.g., 1404 and 1406) can be formed of a glass material. The glass
material may
include architectural glass, and/or shatter-resistant glass. The glass may
comprise a silicon
oxide (S0x). The glass may comprise a soda-lime glass or float glass. The
glass may
comprise at least about 75% silica (SiO2). The glass may comprise oxides such
as Na2O, or
CaO. The glass may comprise alkali or alkali-earth oxides. The glass may
comprise one or
more additives. The first and/or the second panes can include any material
having suitable
optical, electrical, thermal, and/or mechanical properties. Other materials
(e.g., substrates)
that can be included in the first and/or the second panes are plastic, semi-
plastic and/or
thermoplastic materials, for example, poly(methyl methacrylate), polystyrene,
polycarbonate,
allyl diglycol carbonate, SAN (styrene acrylonitrile copolymer), poly(4-methyl-
1-pentene),
polyester, and/or polyamide. The first and/or second pane may include mirror
material (e.g.,
silver). In some implementations, the first and/or the second panes can be
strengthened.
The strengthening may include tempering, heating, and/or chemically
strengthening.
[0171] In some embodiments, the sensor(s) are operatively coupled
to at least one
controller and/or processor. Sensor readings may be obtained by one or more
processors
and/or controllers. A controller may comprise a processing unit (e.g., CPU or
CPU). A
controller may receive an input (e.g., from at least one sensor). The
controller may comprise
circuitry, electrical wiring, optical wiring, socket, and/or outlet. A
controller may deliver an
output. A controller may comprise multiple (e.g., sub-) controllers. The
controller may be a
part of a control system. A control system may comprise a master controller,
floor (e.g.,
comprising network controller) controller, a local controller. The local
controller may be a
window controller (e.g., controlling an optically switchable window),
enclosure controller, or
component controller. For example, a controller may be a part of a hierarchal
control system
(e.g., comprising a main controller that directs one or more controllers,
e.g., floor controllers,
local controllers (e.g., window controllers), enclosure controllers, and/or
component
controllers). A physical location of the controller type in the hierarchal
control system may be
changing. For example: At a first time: a first processor may assume a role of
a main
controller, a second processor may assume a role of a floor controller, and a
third processor
may assume the role of a local controller. At a second time: the second
processor may
assume a role of a main controller, the first processor may assume a role of a
floor
controller, and the third processor may remain with the role of a local
controller. At a third
time: the third processor may assume a role of a main controller, the second
processor may
assume a role of a floor controller, and the first processor may assume the
role of a local
controller. A controller may control one or more devices (e.g., be directly
coupled to the
devices). A controller may be disposed proximal to the one or more devices it
is controlling.
For example, a controller may control an optically switchable device (e.g.,
IGU), an antenna,
a sensor, and/or an output device (e.g., a light source, sounds source, smell
source, gas
source, HVAC outlet, or heater). In one embodiment, a floor controller may
direct one or
58
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
more window controllers, one or more enclosure controllers, one or more
component
controllers, or any combination thereof. The floor controller may comprise a
floor controller.
For example, the floor (e.g., comprising network) controller may control a
plurality of local
(e.g., comprising window) controllers. A plurality of local controllers may be
disposed in a
portion of a facility (e.g., in a portion of a building). The portion of the
facility may be a floor of
a facility. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a floor. In
some embodiments, a
floor may comprise a plurality of floor controllers, e.g., depending on the
floor size and/or the
number of local controllers coupled to the floor controller. For example, a
floor controller may
be assigned to a portion of a floor. For example, a floor controller may be
assigned to a
portion of the local controllers disposed in the facility. For example, a
floor controller may be
assigned to a portion of the floors of a facility. A master controller may be
coupled to one or
more floor controllers. The floor controller may be disposed in the facility.
The master
controller may be disposed in the facility, or external to the facility. The
master controller may
be disposed in the cloud. A controller may be a part of, or be operatively
coupled to, a
building management system. A controller may receive one or more inputs. A
controller may
generate one or more outputs. The controller may be a single input single
output controller
(SISO) or a multiple input multiple output controller (MIM0). A controller may
interpret an
input signal received. A controller may acquire data from the one or more
components (e.g.,
sensors). Acquire may comprise receive or extract. The data may comprise
measurement,
estimation, determination, generation, or any combination thereof. A
controller may comprise
feedback control. A controller may comprise feed-forward control. Control may
comprise on-
off control, proportional control, proportional-integral (PI) control, or
proportional-integral-
derivative (PID) control. Control may comprise open loop control, or closed
loop control. A
controller may comprise closed loop control. A controller may comprise open
loop control. A
controller may comprise a user interface. A user interface may comprise (or
operatively
coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch screen, microphone, speech
recognition
package, camera, imaging system, or any combination thereof. Outputs may
include a
display (e.g., screen), speaker, or printer. Fig. 15 shows an example of a
control system
architecture 1500 comprising a master controller 1508 that controls floor
controllers 1506,
that in turn control local controllers 1504. In some embodiments, a local
controller controls
one or more IGUs, one or more sensors, one or more output devices (e.g., one
or more
emitters), or any combination thereof. Fig. 15 shows an example of a
configuration in which
the master controller is operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired)
to a building
management system (BMS) 1524 and to a database 1520. Arrows in FIG. 15
represents
communication pathways. A controller may be operatively coupled (e.g.,
directly/indirectly
and/or wired and/wirelessly) to an external source 1510. The external source
may comprise
a network. The external source may comprise one or more sensor or output
device. The
external source may comprise a cloud-based application and/or database. The
59
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
communication may be wired and/or wireless. The external source may be
disposed external
to the facility. For example, the external source may comprise one or more
sensors and/or
antennas disposed, e.g., on a wall or on a ceiling of the facility. The
communication may be
monodirectional or bidirectional. In the example shown in Fig. 15 the
communication all
communication arrows are meant to be bidirectional. Fig. 15 shows an example
of a
perspective view of an enclosure 1501 (e.g., building).
[0172] The controller may monitor and/or direct (e.g., physical)
alteration of the operating
conditions of the apparatuses, software, and/or methods described herein.
Control may
comprise regulate, manipulate, restrict, direct, monitor, adjust, modulate,
vary, alter, restrain,
check, guide, or manage. Controlled (e.g., by a controller) may include
attenuated,
modulated, varied, managed, curbed, disciplined, regulated, restrained,
supervised,
manipulated, and/or guided. The control may comprise controlling a control
variable (e.g.,
temperature, power, voltage, and/or profile). The control can comprise real
time or off-line
control. A calculation utilized by the controller can be done in real time,
and/or offline. The
controller may be a manual or a non-manual controller. The controller may be
an automatic
controller. The controller may operate upon request. The controller may be a
programmable
controller. The controller may be programed. The controller may comprise a
processing unit
(e.g., CPU or GPU). The controller may receive an input (e.g., from at least
one sensor). The
controller may deliver an output. The controller may comprise multiple (e.g.,
sub-)
controllers. The controller may be a part of a control system. The control
system may
comprise a master controller, floor controller, local controller (e.g.,
enclosure controller, or
window controller). The controller may receive one or more inputs. The
controller may
generate one or more outputs. The controller may be a single input single
output controller
(SISO) or a multiple input multiple output controller (MIM0). The controller
may interpret the
input signal received. The controller may acquire data from the one or more
sensors.
Acquire may comprise receive or extract. The data may comprise measurement,
estimation,
determination, generation, or any combination thereof. The controller may
comprise
feedback control. The controller may comprise feed-forward control. The
control may
comprise on-off control, proportional control, proportional-integral (PI)
control, or
proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control. The control may comprise open
loop control, or
closed loop control. The controller may comprise closed loop control. The
controller may
comprise open loop control. The controller may comprise a user interface. The
user interface
may comprise (or operatively coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch
screen,
microphone, speech recognition package, camera, imaging system, or any
combination
thereof. The outputs may include a display (e.g., screen), speaker, or
printer.
The methods, systems and/or the apparatus described herein may comprise a
control
system. The control system can be in communication with any of the apparatuses
(e.g.,
sensors) described herein. The sensors may be of the same type or of different
types, e.g.,
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
as described herein. For example, the control system may be in communication
with the first
sensor and/or with the second sensor. The control system may control the one
or more
sensors. The control system may control one or more components of a building
management system (e.g., lightening, security, and/or air conditioning
system). The
controller may regulate at least one (e.g., environmental) characteristic of
the enclosure. The
control system may regulate the enclosure environment using any component of
the building
management system. For example, the control system may regulate the energy
supplied by
a heating element and/or by a cooling element. For example, the control system
may
regulate velocity of an air flowing through a vent to and/or from the
enclosure. The control
system may comprise a processor. The processor may be a processing unit. The
controller
may comprise a processing unit. The processing unit may be central. The
processing unit
may comprise a central processing unit (abbreviated herein as "CPU"). The
processing unit
may be a graphic processing unit (abbreviated herein as "CPU"). The
controller(s) or control
mechanisms (e.g., comprising a computer system) may be programmed to implement
one or
more methods of the disclosure. The processor may be programmed to implement
methods
of the disclosure. The controller may control at least one component of the
forming systems
and/or apparatuses disclosed herein.
[0173] Fig. 16 shows a schematic example of a computer system 1600 that is
programmed or otherwise configured to one or more operations of any of the
methods
provided herein. The computer system can control (e.g., direct, monitor,
and/or regulate)
various features of the methods, apparatuses and systems of the present
disclosure, such
as, for example, control heating, cooling, lightening, and/or venting of an
enclosure, or any
combination thereof. The computer system can be part of, or be in
communication with, any
sensor or device (e.g., including sensor and/or emitter) ensemble disclosed
herein. The
computer may be coupled to one or more mechanisms disclosed herein, and/or any
parts
thereof. For example, the computer may be coupled to one or more sensors,
valves,
switches, lights, windows (e.g., IGUs), motors, pumps, optical components, or
any
combination thereof.
[0174] In some embodiments, the circuitry is operatively (e.g.,
communicatively) coupled
to a network of the enclosure (e.g., facility comprising a building). The
circuitry may comprise
a driver board, or a controller. The controller may be any controller
disclosed herein (e.g.,
timing controller, touch screen controller, and/or any controller of the
(e.g., hierarchical)
control system). The controller may be operatively coupled to a device
ensemble. The
device ensemble may comprise a sensor or an emitter. For example, the device
ensemble
may comprise a plurality of sensors, a plurality of emitters, or any
combination thereof. The
emitter may be a light (e.g., LED) or a sound (e.g., buzzer or loudspeaker)
emitter. The
sensor may sense any environmental characteristic of the environment (e.g.,
light,
temperature, chemical content (e.g., of the atmosphere), or sound). The
chemical content
61
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
may comprise volatile organic compounds (VOCs), carbon dioxide, oxygen, carbon
monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, or humidity. The control system may be configured
to control
(e.g., via the network) the environment, e.g., using a building management
system. The
control system may be configured to control (e.g., via the network) a
ventilation, heating, air
conditioning, cooling, lighting, security, safety, fire, or sound system of
the enclosure (e.g.,
facility). The control system may be configured to control (e.g., via the
network) the at least
one tintable window, display construct, and/or touch screen. The network may
facilitate
updating any of the software (e.g., non-transitory computer readable media)
associated with
the devices to which it is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled. The
network may
facilitate updating any of the logic (e.g., control logic) associated with the
devices to which it
is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled. The logic may be embedded in a
software.
The network may facilitate updating any of the data streams associated with
the devices to
which it is operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled. The update may be in
real-time. The
network may facilitate a response time and/or update time having a delay of at
most about 2
milliseconds (ms), 3ms, 4ms, 5nns, 7ms, 10nns, or 15ms. The network may
facilitate low
latency communication. The display construct, touch screen functionality,
and/or tintable
window may (e.g., each) have a unique identification (alphanumeric) code. The
display
construct, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable window may (e.g., each)
be uniquely
recognized by the network and/or control system. The display construct, touch
screen
functionality, and/or tintable window may (e.g., each) be uniquely identified
as a device
and/or node by the network and/or control system.
[0175] In some embodiments, the device (e.g., display construct,
touch screen
functionality, and/or tintable window) is communicatively coupled to the
network. A third
party device and/or data stream (e.g., third party media provider) may utilize
a network
authentication protocol, e.g., to communicate with the control system and/o
with another
device. The network authentication protocol may open one or more ports for
network access.
The port(s) may be opened when an organization and/or a facility authenticates
(e.g.,
through network authentication) an identity of a device that attempts to
operatively couple
(and/or physically couples) to the network. Operative coupling may comprise
communicatively coupling. The organization and/or facility may authorize
(e.g., using the
network) access of the device to the network. The access may or may not be
restricted. The
restriction may comprise one or more security levels. The identity of the
device can be
determined based on the credentials and/or certificate. The credentials and/or
certificate
may be confirmed by the network (e.g., by a server operatively coupled to the
network). The
authentication protocol may or may not be specific for physical communication
(e.g.,
Ethernet communication) in a local area network (LAN), e.g., that utilizes
packets. The
standard may be maintained by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE).
The standard may specify the physical media (e.g., target apparatus) and/or
the working
62
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
characteristics of the network (e.g., Ethernet). The networking standard may
support virtual
LANs (VLANs) on a local area (e.g., Ethernet) network. The standard may
support power
over local area network (e.g., Ethernet). The network may provide
communication over
power line (e.g., coaxial cable). The power may be direct current (DC) power.
The power
may be at least about 12 Watts (W), 15 W, 25W, 30W, 40W, 48W, 50W, or 100W.
The
standard may facilitate mesh networking. The standard may facilitate a local
area
network (LAN) technology and/or wide area network (WAN) applications. The
standard may
facilitate physical connections between target apparatuses and/or
infrastructure devices
(hubs, switches, routers), e.g., by various types of cables (e.g., coaxial,
twisted wires, copper
cables, and/or fiber cables). Examples of network authentication protocols can
be 802.1X, or
KERBEROS. The network authentication protocol may comprise secret-key
cryptography.
The network can support (e.g., communication) protocols comprising 802.3,
802.3af (PoE),
802.3at (PoE+), 802.1Q, or 802.11s. The network may support a communication
protocol for
Building Automation and Control (BAC) networks (e.g., BACnet). The protocol
may define
service(s) used to communicate between various devices coupled to the network.
The one
or more devices include sensors, emitters, tintable windows, display
constructs, touch
screen functionality, controllers, transceivers, antennas, third party media
provider related
equipment, personal computers, mobile circuitry (e.g., laptop, cellular phone,
touch pad),
and/or any other (e.g., third party) devices. The protocol services may
include device and
object discovery (e.g., Who-Is, I-Am, Who-Has, and/or I-Have). The protocol
services may
include Read-Property and Write-Property (e.g., for data sharing). The network
protocol may
define object types (e.g., that are acted upon by the services). The protocol
may define one
or more data links and/or physical layers (e.g., ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP,
BACnet/lPv6,
BACnet/MSTP, Point-To-Point over RS-232, Master-Slave/Token-Passing over RS-
485, ZigBee, and/or LonTalk). The protocol may be dedicated to devices (e.g.,
Internet of
Things (loT) devices and/or machine to machine (M2M) communication). The
protocol may
be a messaging protocol. The protocol may be a publish ¨ subscribe type
protocol. The
protocol may be configured for messaging transport. The protocol may be
configured for
remote devices. The protocol may be configured for devices having a small code
footprint
and/or minimal network bandwidth. The small code footprint may be configured
to be
handled by microcontrollers. The protocol may have a plurality of quality of
service levels
including (i) at most once, (ii) at least once, and/or (iii) exactly once. The
plurality of quality of
service levels may increase reliability of the message delivery in the network
(e.g., to its
target). The protocol may facilitate messaging (i) between device to cloud
and/or (ii) between
cloud to device. The messaging protocol is configured for broadcasting
messages to groups
of devices (e.g., as described herein) such sensors, and/or emitters. The
protocol may
comply with Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information
Standards (OASIS). The protocol may support security schemes such as
authentication
63
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
(e.g., using tokens). The protocol may support access delegation standard
(e.g., 0Auth).
The protocol may support granting a first application (and/or website) access
to information
on a second application (and/or website) without providing the second with a
security code
(e.g., token and/or password) relating to the first application. The protocol
may comprise a
Message Queuing Telemetry Transport (MQTT) or Advanced Message Queuing
Protocol (AMQP) protocol. The protocol may be configured for a message rate of
at least
one (1) message per second (e.g., per publisher), or more messages per second
(e.g., per
publisher). The protocol may be configured to facilitate a message payload
size of at most
about 64, 86, 96, or 128 bytes. The protocol may be configured to communicate
with any
device (e.g., from a microcontroller to a server) that operates a protocol
compliant (e.g.,
MQTT) library and/or connects to compliant broker (e.g., MQTT broker) over a
network.
Each device (e.g., target apparatus, sensor, or emitter) can be a publisher
and/or a
subscriber. At least one broker can handle millions of concurrently connected
devices, or
less than millions. The broker can handle at least about 100, 10000, 100000,
1000000, or
10000000 concurrently connected devices. In some embodiments, the broker is
responsible
for receiving at least a portion (e.g., all) of the messages, filtering the
messages, determining
who is interested in each message, and/or sending the message to these
subscribed device
(e.g., broker client). The protocol may require internet connectivity to the
network. The
protocol may facilitate bi-directional, and/or synchronous peer-to-peer
messaging. The
protocol may be a binary wire protocol. Examples of such network protocol,
control system,
and network can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.
63/000,342, filed
March 26, 2020, titled "MESSAGING IN A MULTI CLIENT NETWORK," which is
incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[0176] The computer system can include a processing unit (e.g., 1606) (also
"processor,"
"computer" and "computer processor" used herein). The computer system may
include
memory or memory location (e.g., 1602) (e.g., random-access memory, read-only
memory,
flash memory), electronic storage unit (e.g., 1604) (e.g., hard disk),
communication interface
(e.g., 1603) (e.g., network adapter) for communicating with one or more other
systems, and
peripheral devices (e.g., 1605), such as cache, other memory, data storage
and/or electronic
display adapters. In the example shown in Fig. 16, the memory 1602, storage
unit 1604,
interface 1603, and peripheral devices 1605 are in communication with the
processing unit
1606 through a communication bus (solid lines), such as a motherboard. The
storage unit
can be a data storage unit (or data repository) for storing data. The computer
system can be
operatively coupled to a computer network ("network") (e.g., 1601) with the
aid of the
communication interface. The network can be the Internet, an internet and/or
extranet, or an
intranet and/or extranet that is in communication with the Internet. In some
cases, the
network is a telecommunication and/or data network. The network can include
one or more
computer servers, which can enable distributed computing, such as cloud
computing. The
64
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
network, in some cases with the aid of the computer system, can implement a
peer-to-peer
network, which may enable devices coupled to the computer system to behave as
a client or
a server.
[0177] The processing unit can execute a sequence of machine-readable
instructions,
which can be embodied in a program or software. The instructions may be stored
in a
memory location, such as the memory 1602. The instructions can be directed to
the
processing unit, which can subsequently program or otherwise configure the
processing unit
to implement methods of the present disclosure. Examples of operations
performed by the
processing unit can include fetch, decode, execute, and write back. The
processing unit may
interpret and/or execute instructions. The processor may include a
microprocessor, a data
processor, a central processing unit (CPU), a graphical processing unit (GPU),
a system-on-
chip (SOC), a co-processor, a network processor, an application specific
integrated circuit
(ASIC), an application specific instruction-set processor (ASIPs), a
controller, a
programmable logic device (PLD), a chipset, a field programmable gate array
(FPGA), or
any combination thereof. The processing unit can be part of a circuit, such as
an integrated
circuit. One or more other components of the system 1600 can be included in
the circuit.
[0178] The storage unit can store files, such as drivers, libraries and saved
programs. The
storage unit can store user data (e.g., user preferences and user programs).
In some cases,
the computer system can include one or more additional data storage units that
are external
to the computer system, such as located on a remote server that is in
communication with
the computer system through an intranet or the Internet.
[0179] The computer system can communicate with one or more remote computer
systems through a network. For instance, the computer system can communicate
with a
remote computer system of a user (e.g., operator). Examples of remote computer
systems
include personal computers (e.g., portable PC), slate or tablet PC's (e.g.,
Apple iPad,
Samsung Galaxy Tab), telephones, Smart phones (e.g., Apple iPhone, Android-
enabled
device, Blackberry ), or personal digital assistants. A user (e.g., client)
can access the
computer system via the network.
[0180] Methods as described herein can be implemented by way of machine (e.g.,
computer processor) executable code stored on an electronic storage location
of the
computer system, such as, for example, on the memory 1602 or electronic
storage unit
1604. The machine executable or machine-readable code can be provided in the
form of
software. During use, the processor 1606 can execute the code. In some cases,
the code
can be retrieved from the storage unit and stored on the memory for ready
access by the
processor. In some situations, the electronic storage unit can be precluded,
and machine-
executable instructions are stored on memory.
[0181] The code can be pre-compiled and configured for use with a machine have
a
processer adapted to execute the code or can be compiled during runtime. The
code can be
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
supplied in a programming language that can be selected to enable the code to
execute in a
pre-compiled or as-compiled fashion.
[0182] In some embodiments, the processor comprises a code. The code can be
program
instructions. The program instructions may cause the at least one processor
(e.g., computer)
to direct a feed forward and/or feedback control loop. In some embodiments,
the program
instructions cause the at least one processor to direct a closed loop and/or
open loop control
scheme. The control may be based at least in part on one or more sensor
readings (e.g.,
sensor data). One controller may direct a plurality of operations. At least
two operations may
be directed by different controllers. In some embodiments, a different
controller may direct at
least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, different
controllers may direct
at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, a non-
transitory computer-
readable medium cause each a different computer to direct at least two of
operations (a), (b)
and (c). In some embodiments, different non-transitory computer-readable
mediums cause
each a different computer to direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and
(c). The controller
and/or computer readable media may direct any of the apparatuses or components
thereof
disclosed herein. The controller and/or computer readable media may direct any
operations
of the methods disclosed herein.
[0183] In some embodiments, at least one display construct and
associated integrated
glass unit(s) are operated in coordination with one another. Control of the at
least one
display construct and associated tintable window (e.g., integrated glass
unit(s)) may be via
integration of the display construct control with control of the tintable
window. For example,
the display construct and the tintable glass may be operatively (e.g.,
communicatively)
coupled to the control system, e.g., via the network. Control of the at least
one display
construct may be via Ethernet. A tint level of the tintable window(s) may be
adjusted when
one or more associated display constructs are in use. The tint level of the
tintable window
may automatically change (e.g., darken) when the one or more display
constructs are in use.
Automatically changing (e.g., darkening or lightening) the tint level of the
tintable window(s)
may be based at least in part on outside radiation and/or display contrast.
Automatically
changing the tint level of the tintable window may be based at least in part
on privacy (e.g.,
limiting an ability to see the display construct from someone outside of the
facility). When the
tintable window(s) is in use, a zone of tintable windows may have its tint
level (automatically)
altered (e.g., darkened or lightened). A zone of tintable windows may comprise
a plurality of
tintable windows. The zone may comprise (i) tintable windows facing a
particular direction of
an enclosure (e.g., facility), (ii) a plurality of tintable windows on a
particular face (e.g.,
facade) of a facility, (iii) a tintable windows on a particular floor of a
facility, (iv) a plurality of
tintable windows in a particular type of room and/or activity (e.g., open
space, office,
conference room, lecture hall, corridor, reception hall, or cafeteria), (v)
tintable windows
disposed on the same fixture (e.g., internal or external wall), and/or (vi) a
plurality of tintable
66
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
windows that are user defined (e.g., a group of tintable windows in a room or
on a façade
that are a subset of a larger group of tintable windows, for example, a
conference room with
a display construct on one of eight tintable windows may darken the tint of
eight tintable
windows¨the zone). The (automatic) tinting of the tintable window may be based
at least in
part on whether the display construct is showing active content (e.g., content
intended for
user viewing) or inactive content. The automatic changing of the tint level of
the tintable
window when the at least one display construct is in use, may be overridden by
a user (e.g.,
by manually adjusting the tint level). A user may override the automatic
tinting of the tintable
window(s) using mobile circuitry (e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality
controller, a
cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer and/or by a similar
mobile device).
[0184] In some embodiments, at least one display construct and
associated tintable
window(s) may be adjacent to a heat dissipation system (e.g., heater). Heat
adjacent to the
display construct (e.g., heat generated by the display construct, any touch
screen, circuitry,
power supply, adjacent sensors, adjacent emitters, and/or sun radiation (e.g.,
transmitted
through the tintable window)) may be dissipated. The heat may be transferred
via
conduction, convection, and/or electromagnetic waves (radiation). The heat may
be actively
or passively removed. Heat may be removed via convection and/or conduction.
The active
heat removal may be controlled (e.g., using the control system). Active (e.g.,
forced)
convection (e.g., fans) may create air flow to dissipate heat adjacent to the
display
construct(s). The air flow may be in gaps (e.g., between the tintable
window(s) and the
display construct(s)). One or more temperature sensor(s) adjacent to the
display construct(s)
and/or operatively coupled to the display construct may sense a temperature
and signal to
initiate forced convection when a first (high) temperature threshold is
reached. The
temperature sensor(s) may (automatically) shut down the display construct(s)
when a
second (higher) temperature threshold is reached (e.g., to prevent malfunction
and/or
damage). The damage may be permanent or temporary. The first temperature
threshold
may be of a lower temperature value than the second temperature threshold. The
threshold
may depend on ambient temperature. Ambient temperature may include temperature
external to the enclosure in which the display construct is disposed, or
temperature in the
enclosure in which the display construct is disposed. Thermal heat penetrating
through the
tintable window(s) may be limited (e.g., via a use of low emissivity (Lo-E)
glass), e.g., to
reduce a thermal load on the display construct(s).
[0185] In some embodiments, an operation of at least one display construct and
associated tintable window(s) includes maintenance tasks associated with the
display
construct(s). Control of maintenance tasks of the display construct (e.g.,
pixel compensation,
temperature, usage and/or resetting) may be automatic (e.g., using the control
system).
Pixel compensation may include adjusting a brightness of a pixel in the
display construct
based at least in part on how that pixel has been used over its lifetime. For
example, what
67
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
wavelength and/or intensity the pixel emitted, and optionally for how long.
For example, how
frequently was the wavelength and/or intensity projected by the pixel. For
example, what has
been displayed by that pixel (e.g., video with motion or static display). The
display construct
temperature, the fan speed, the extent of display construct usage, and/or the
type of display
construct usage, may be monitored over time. Monitoring may by a control
system.
Monitoring may utilize a sensor coupled to the network (e.g., and to the
control systems).
The monitoring may be in situ and/or in real time while the display construct
is projecting
media. The control system may utilize image processing to assess the status of
one or more
emitting entities (e.g., LEDs or other lights) of the display construct. The
sensor may
comprise a camera (e.g., stills or video camera). The camera may comprise a
pixel array
(e.g., charge-coupled device (CCD) camera). The camera may be configured for
digital
imaging (e.g., CCD or a complementary metal¨oxide¨semiconductor (CMOS)
camera). The
camera may comprise a photographic plate. The camera may be sensitive to color
gamut
(e.g., the full range of colors visible to an average human eye). The control
system may
monitor the display construct continuously and/or intermittently (e.g., at
predetermined
intervals). The control system may record data relating to monitoring the
display construct
continuously or intermittently. The data may be recorded at predetermined
intervals and/or
when a threshold has been reached. The threshold may be thermal, electrical,
and/or optical
threshold. The threshold may be time dependent (e.g., temperature of over 50 C
for more
than about 1 minute). The display construct adjustment (e.g., reset) may be
based at least in
part on such monitoring of the display construct (e.g., optical, thermal,
and/or electrical)
properties (e.g., depending on a time threshold). The threshold may be a value
or a function
(e.g., time and/or space dependent function). Space may relate to a type of
enclosure in
which the display construct is disposed. For example, a display construct in a
conference
room may have a lower error tolerance than a display construct in a corridor.
The monitoring
of the display construct may provide predictions regarding the life of
component(s) of the
display construct (e.g., pixels, electrical circuitry, filter and/or fan).
Monitoring the display
construct (e.g., over time) may proactively compensate for any predicted decay
in
components related to, or of, the display construct (e.g., pixels, electrical
circuitry, filter
and/or fan). Monitor and/or diagnostics of the display construct may be via a
network (e.g., a
network disposed, at least in part, in a skin of the facility). Monitoring
and/or diagnostics of
the display construct may be by a control system. Adjusting (e.g., resetting)
the display
construct may include (automatically and/or controllably) turning the display
construct off and
on. The display construct may be cycled once per time interval (e.g., every at
least about 24
hours, 36 hours, 48 hours, or 72 hours), e.g., if the pixels of the display
construct may be
susceptible to malfunction (e.g., burn failures). The time interval may depend
on the type of
predicted failure and/or its extent (e.g., predicted failure of one pixel, or
predicted failure of a
group of pixels). The time interval for cycling may depend on the type of
viewing of the
68
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
display construct. For example, static viewing done for longer than a
predetermined
threshold of time (e.g., use the display construct as a sign) may increase the
risk of pixel
malfunction (e.g., failure). More frequent on/off cycling when the display
construct is used for
static viewing as opposed to video with movement, may reduce the risk of pixel
malfunction
in static viewing. The control system may predict (e.g., via a software
module) maintenance
and/or replacement of the display construct or any of its components (e.g.,
based on the
monitored pixel status). The predictions may be based at least in part on real-
time sensor
measurements of an output of the display construct (e.g., as compared to an
expected
output). The predictions may be based at least in part on prior sensor
measurements of an
output of the display construct (e.g., as compared to an expected output),
e.g., done in a
laboratory or other test facility (e.g., fatigue tests). The predictions may
be based at least in
part on observation of the display construct to be maintained/replaced. The
predictions may
be based at least in part on observation of other display construct (e.g., a
test display
construct) than the one to be maintained/replaced. The predictions may be
based at least in
part on average pixel status, e.g., considering the irradiation profile of the
display construct
and/or any of its individual pixels. The control system may provide
notification regarding
anticipated replacement and/or maintenance. Such predictions may allow
performance of
proactive maintenance and/or replacement. Such predictions may allow
prospective stocking
of respective display constructs to be maintained and/or replaced. Such
predictions may
allow for timely scheduling of personnel that would perform such maintenance
and/or
replacement.
[0186] Fig. 18 shows an example of operations related to at least one display
construct
and associated tintable window(s). Control of the at least one display
construct and
associated tintable window(s) may be via integration of the display construct
control with
control of the tintable window(s). Control of the at least one display
construct may be via the
network. In block 1801, a tint level of at least one tintable window is
adjusted when one or
more associated display construct(s) is in use and/or in preparation for the
display
construct's usage. For example, the tint level of the tintable window(s) may
automatically
darken when the one or more display construct(s) is in use. Automatically
darkening the tint
level of the at least one tintable window may be based at least in part on (i)
outside radiation,
(ii) media displayed on the display contrast, (iii) type of media displayed
(e.g., static or
changing), and/or (iv) privacy request. Automatically darkening the tint level
of the tintable
window(s) may be based at least in part on privacy (e.g., limiting an ability
to see the display
construct from someone outside of the facility). When one or more display
constructs is in
use, a zone of tintable windows may have their tint level altered (e.g.,
darkened). A zone of
tintable windows may include a plurality of tintable windows facing a
particular direction in a
facility, may be a plurality of tintable windows on a particular face of a
facility, may be a
plurality of tintable windows on a particular floor of a facility, may be a
plurality of tintable
69
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
windows in a particular type of room (e.g., open space, office, conference
room, lecture hall,
cafeteria), and/or may be a plurality of tintable windows that are user
defined (e.g., a group
of tintable windows in a room or on a façade that are a subset of a larger
group of tintable
windows, for example, a conference room with a display construct on one of
eight tintable
windows may darken the tint of eight tintable windows¨the zone). The zone may
be any
zone disclosed herein. The automatic tinting of the tintable window may be
based at least in
part on whether the display construct is showing active content (e.g., content
intended for
user viewing) or inactive content. In block 1803, the automatic darkening of
the tint level of
the tintable window may be overridden by a user manually adjusting the tint
level of the one
or more tintable windows. A user may override the automatic tinting of the
tintable window(s)
using mobile circuitry (e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality
controller, a cellular phone,
an electronic notepad and/or a laptop computer). In block 1804, heat adjacent
to the display
construct (e.g., heat generated by any components related to the display
construct and/or
sun radiation transmitted through the tintable window) may be dissipated and
passively
and/or actively (e.g., controllably) removed (e.g., using automatic actuation
of fans or any
other heat exchangers). A temperature sensor adjacent to the display construct
may sense
the temperature and signal to start the active heat exchange operation (e.g.,
initiating forced
convection) when a first high temperature threshold is reached. The
temperature sensor may
shut down the display construct(s) when a second higher temperature threshold
is reached.
Operation 1805 shows (e.g., automating) prediction and/or anticipation of
maintenance
task(s) of the display construct (e.g., pixel compensation, temperature, usage
and/or
resetting). Pixel compensation may include adjusting a brightness of a pixel
in the display
construct based at least in part on how much that pixel has been used, how
often that pixel
has been used and/or what has been displayed by that pixel (e.g., video with
motion or static
display). The display construct temperature, the active heat exchange
intensity (e.g., fan
speed) and/or the amount of display construct usage, may be monitored. The
display
construct adjustment (e.g., reset) may be based at least in part on the
monitoring of the
display construct properties. As the pixels deteriorate, they may require more
current and/or
voltage to produce a requested output. The display construct adjustment may
comprise
adjusting intensity of one or more pixels of the display construct to generate
the requested
output. The monitoring of the display construct may provide predictions
regarding the status
and/or predicted lifespan of components in the display construct (e.g.,
pixels, electrical
circuitry, filter and/or fan). The control system may notify and/or
proactively compensate for
any predicted decay in components related to the display construct. Monitoring
and/or
diagnostics of the display construct may be via a network, which may be
disposed, at least in
part, in a skin of the facility. In block 1807 the display construct is
optionally adjusted and/or
reset. The adjustment and/or resent may include automatically turning the
display construct
off and on, e.g., to crease pixel lifespan and/or reduce pixel output
malfunction.
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0187] In some embodiments, an operation of at least one display construct and
associated tintable window(s) is based at least in part on a status of at
least one display
construct. A status of the display construct may be examined, monitored,
and/or verified as
to whether the at least one display construct is on. If the at least one
display construct is not
on, then a default and/or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) may be
activated. The
(e.g., on/off) status of the display construct may be periodically checked. If
the at least one
display construct is on (e.g., operating), then a determination may be made
whether the
display construct is displaying active or passive content. If the display
construct is not on
(e.g., not displaying media), then a default or manual tint level of the
tintable window(s) may
be activated. If the display construct is displaying active content, (i) a
zone of tintable
windows in proximity to the display construct(s) displaying active content may
be identified,
(ii) may have the tint level identified of the windows in the zone (e.g.,
different tint level
based at least in part on presence of sun radiation, sun glare and/or desired
contrast) and/or
(iii) may adjust the tint levels of the tintable windows in the identified
zone.
[0188] Fig. 19 shows an example of control operations relating to
at least one display
construct and associated tintable window(s). A status of the at least one
display construct is
checked in block 1901. In block 1902, the control system determines whether
the at least
one display construct is on (e.g., at least one pixel is controllably emitting
radiation). If the at
least one display construct is not on, then a default or manual tint level of
the tintable
window(s) is activated in block 1903, and the status of the display construct
is periodically
checked. If the at least one display construct is on, then a determination may
be made
whether the display construct is displaying active content in block 1904. If
not, then a default
or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) may be activated in block 1903,
and the status
of the display construct is periodically checked. If the display construct is
displaying active
content, tintable window(s) in proximity to the display construct(s)
displaying active content is
identified in block 1905. The tintable window(s) may have their tint level
identified (e.g.,
different tint level based at least in part on presence of sun/glare and
desired contrast) in
block 1906, and any tint level adjustment is made to the tintable windows in
block 1907. The
tintable windows may be part of the zone (e.g., and the zone may be identified
by the
controller), or not part of the zone. If a first tintable window coupled to a
display construct is
part of a zone that comprises at least one second tintable window not coupled
to a display
construct. The tint of the second tintable window may or may not be altered to
the tint of the
first tintable window. Altering tint of other windows in the zone in concert
with alteration of
the tint of the tintable window that is coupled with the display construct,
may be
predetermined, and/or determined by a user.
[0189] In some embodiments, a plurality of display constructs is
connected together in a
control scheme. A plurality of display constructs may be mounted adjacent to
one or tintable
windows. The tintable windows may be connected (e.g., wired or wirelessly),
via local (e.g.,
71
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
window) controllers as part of a control system. The control system may
comprise a distributed
network of controllers coupled to a power and/or communication network. The
control system
can control various functions (e.g., functions of a facility (e.g., office
building, warehouse,
etc.)), which may include adjusting the tint of the tintable window(s) and/or
displaying media
content on the display construct. The display constructs may be connected
(e.g., wired or
wirelessly), via a display interface that may be housed in one or more
housings. The display
interface housing may be referred to herein as electrical-box ((E)-box) e.g.,
2006. The E-Box
may be operatively coupled (e.g., for power and/or communication) to the
network. The
network may provide data and/or power to the display constructs. A user
content server may
provide data through the network to be displayed on the display constructs
and/or may provide
data and power to the display interface via one or more connections to the
display interface.
The display interface may include an adapter (e.g., Ethernet adapter (e.g., RS-
485-to-
ethernet)) and/or the E-boxes may include native adapter (e.g., Ethernet/IP)
support. The E-
box may send prompts and/or respond to queries from the network. The
connection of devices
for data transmission may include, for example, Ethernet, HDMI, Display Port,
RS-485 and/or
other types of connections for data and/or media transmission. Power may be
provided to the
E-boxes via power-over-internet and/or via separate power cables. The
plurality of display
constructs may show different content on each display construct, may show the
same (e.g.,
duplicate) content, or may be configured to show one image across multiple
display constructs
(e.g., such that a section of the image with be shown on each of the plurality
of display
construct). The connection of display constructs may allow for small numbers
(e.g., at most
10, 9, 8, 5, 6, or 4) of display constructs to be controlled via a local
controller. In some
embodiments, a larger number (e.g., more than 10) display constructs may be
coupled via a
network (e.g., floor) controller or may allow for all display constructs in a
facility to be controlled
by a main controller. The display constructs may display media individually
(e.g., independent
of other display constructs) or a group of display constructs (e.g., at least
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20,
25, 50, or 75 display constructs may be arranged in a group (set) of
displays), e.g., that may
be controlled to display data as if a single display construct (e.g., one
media that is respectively
parceled among the displays in a display group). The display constructs may
form a video
wall. The video wall may comprise a plurality of display construct tiled
together (e.g.,
contiguously, or overlapped), in order to form one large screen. The
controller controlling the
video wall controller may parcel a single image to be projected on the video
wall into parts to
be displayed on individual display constructs that constitute the video wall.
Display constructs
may be coupled to a wall (e.g., opaque or transparent), or to a tintable
window. The video wall
controller may comprise hardware-based controller, or software-based & media-
card
controller. The hardware based controller may comprise media processing
chipsets and may
be devoid of an operating system. The software-based & media-card controller
may be
disposed in a processor having an operating system. The processor may be a
server or may
72
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
be local. The processor may be configured with multiple-output graphic cards
and/or video
capture input cards.
[0190] The display constructs may be configured in layouts. The layouts may
comprise
matrix grid layouts (e.g., 2x2, 3x3, or 4x4.) of identical display geometries
(e.g., having the
same aspect ratio). The layouts can comprise layouts of non-identical display
geometries
(e.g., having different aspect ratios), e.g., in configurations other than
symmetrical
matrixes. The media content in displayed may be identical, parceled, or
entirely different. For
example, at least two different parallel contents may be displayed on the
video wall of the
display constructs.
[0191] Fig. 20 shows an example of a control scheme for a
plurality of display constructs.
A plurality of display constructs 2002 may be mounted adjacent to a plurality
of tintable
windows 2003. The tintable windows 2003 may be connected (e.g., wired and/or
wirelessly)
2009, via local (window) controllers 2001, to a control network 2004 that
controls various
functions of a facility (e.g., office building, warehouse, etc.), which may
include adjusting the
tint of the tintable windows 2003. The display constructs 2002 may be
connected (e.g., wired
and/or wirelessly) 2010, via a display interface 2005 and controllers housed
within housings
(also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2006, to control network
2004 (comprising
the control system). The control network may be couple via wiring network to
the tintable
windows and/or display construct, which wiring (e.g., coaxial cables) may
provide data
and/or power to the display constructs 2002. A user content server 2007 may
provide data
(e.g., through the wiring and/or control network) to be displayed on the
display constructs
2002 and/or may provide data and power to the display interface 2005 via one
or more
connections 2011 to the display interface 2005. The display interface may
include an
Ethernet adapter (e.g., RS-485-to-ethernet). The E-boxes 2006 may include
native
Ethernet/IP support. The E-boxes 2006 may send prompts and/or respond to
queries from
the network 2004. The connection of devices for data transmission may include,
for
example, Ethernet, HDMI, Display Port, RS-485 and/or other types of
connections for data
transmission. Power may be provided to the E-boxes 2006 via power-over-
internet and/or
via separate power cables. The plurality of display constructs 2002 may show
different
content, the same content, or may be employed to show one image across
multiple display
constructs 2002 (e.g., as in a video wall).
[0192] In some embodiments, a display construct is utilized to
display various media in a
facility. The display construct may include one or more media displays that
may be at least
partially transparent, e.g., when the display construct is not operating
(e.g., TOLED display).
The display construct may be coupled to (e.g., directly or indirectly) to a
hard surface such
as a wall, a board, or a window (e.g., vision window). The hard surface may be
of a fixture.
The window may be a tintable window (e.g., an electrochromic window). The
window may be
disposed in the building, or in an envelope of the building. The vision window
may comprise
73
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
a tintable window that includes an electrochromic widow that can tint (e.g.,
darken, lighten,
and/or alter its color (e.g., hue)), which can provide a background for
contrasting the media
displayed by the display construct.
[0193] In some embodiments, one or more display constructs may be operatively
coupled
(e.g., mounted) to the hard surface (e.g., window, wall, or board). The
coupling may be via a
hinge, adhesive, fasteners, and/or by other suitable mechanisms. The coupling
may be at
least partially disposed within one or more window frame portions. The window
frame(s) may
include vertical portions (e.g., mullions) and may include horizontal portions
(e.g., transoms).
The display construct may be directly adhered (e.g., using an adhesive) to the
hard surface.
The adhesive may or may not contact the window frame (or portion thereof). The
hard
surface may comprise of a hardened material (e.g., glass, metal, or polymer).
The hard
surface may comprise a solid (e.g., gypsum, ceramic, concrete and/or stone).
Multiple
display constructs may be mounted (e.g., via a hinge, adhesive, fasteners,
and/or by other
mechanism).
[0194] In some embodiments, the display construct is controlled by
at least one controller.
The controller may be part of the control system. The controller may comprise
a controller
than directly couples (e.g., connects) to the display construct. The
connection between the
controller and the display construct may be using wired and/or wireless
communication. The
controller may be coupled to the display construct via a plurality of wiring
(e.g., for
communication and/or power). The controller may be disposed in a housing. The
housing
may comprise one or more materials. The material may include elemental metal,
metal alloy,
polymer (e.g., plastic), resin, wood, glass, composite and/or other materials.
The materials
may comprise transparent or opaque materials. The material may comprise
conductive or
insulating (e.g., dielectric) material. The housing may comprise a dispersing
or specular
material. The housing may have a plurality of faces. At least two (e.g., all)
of the plurality of
the wiring may extend from one face of the plurality of faces of the
controller housing. At
times, one controller housing (e.g., comprising one or more controllers) may
be coupled to a
plurality of display construct. At times, one controller may be (e.g.,
directly) operatively
coupled to one display construct. At times, one controller may be (e.g.,
directly) operatively
coupled to two or more display constructs. Direct coupling may comprise a wire
that
connects the controller and the display construct. The wire may be an
uninterrupted wire.
The controller and/or housing may comprise wiring inlets. The wiring inlets
may or may not
be in the same face as the wiring outlets in the controller housing. At times,
a plurality of
control housings may be disposed adjacent to each other (e.g., contact each
other, or may
be directly coupled to each other (e.g., via wiring). At least two of the
wiring (e.g., all of the
wiring) connecting the controller(s) in at least two different housings (e.g.,
all of the
housings) with at least two (e.g., all) of the display constructs (e.g., in a
set of display
constructs), may extend (i) from the same face type of the housings and/or
(ii) to the same
74
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
general direction (e.g., upwards, downwards, left, or right). The face type
may be assigned
according to the direction in which the face faces (e.g., downward face,
upward face,
eastward face, westward face, northward face, eastward face, or any
combination thereof).
The directions may be relative to a user facing the display construct, and
relative to a
gravitational center.
[0195] In some embodiments, the controller housing is mounted in a
frame portion. The
controller housing may be mounted within at least a portion of the window,
board, or wall
frame. The portion of the frame may be an upper horizontal mullion(s)
(transom(s)), within
lower horizontal mullion(s) (transom(s)), and/or within the vertical (side)
mullions, or a
combination of the mullions that form the window frame(s). Upper and lower are
relative to
the gravitational center. Display connectors may connect a controller to a
display construct
via one or more cables and/or wires. The display connectors connecting
controllers to
respective display constructs, which may be via cables, may extend from one
face of the
plurality of faces of the controller housing or may extend from more than one
face of the
plurality of faces of the controller housing. At least two (e.g., all) of the
cables that connect
the controllers to the corresponding display constructs may be (e.g.,
substantially) of the
same length. The cable may extend at least partially within the window
frame(s). The cables
that connect the controller to the display construct may be of different
lengths. The cable
may extend at least partially within and/or outside of the window frame(s).
The (e.g., local)
controller may include power supply connector that may connect, e.g., to one
or more
electric power supply. Power supply connectors may be disposed in the same
face or in a
different face from the face from which the data cables to the display
construct(s) extend
from. The different faces may form an angle, the angle may be (e.g.,
substantially) a right
angle. The different faces may be parallel to each other. Data (e.g.,
communication and/or
media) cable(s) may connect from one or more sources of data (e.g., server(s))
to the
controllers. The data cables may connect to a media content provider server
and/or a server
that controls a level of tint of the window(s). In some embodiments, the power
and data are
coupled to the display construct via the same cable (e.g., coaxial cable).
[0196] In some embodiments, a plurality of devices (e.g.,
including a sensor and/or
emitter) is integrated into a common housing. The housing may include one or
more circuit
boards. The housing may integrate an ensemble of devices. The ensemble may
have a
single housing (e.g., cover). One or more circuit boards (e.g., printed
circuit boards PCB)
may be disposed in the single housing. At least one controller may be disposed
in the
housing. The housing may be adapted to mount to a window, wall, ceiling, or
any other
structure and/or fixture in an enclosure (e.g., a facility, building, or room)
to perform various
functions. The common assembly of devices (e.g., the ensemble of devices) may
include
power conditioning components, circuitry (e.g., a processing unit), memory,
and/or a network
interface. The housing may comprise mounting adapters that can be provided for
installing
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
an assembly to at least a portion of a fixture such as a window mullion. The
housing may
comprise one or more features desirable for optimal performance, such as (I)
one or more
opening for admitting external environmental characteristic(s) into the
housing, (II) electrical
and/or electromagnetic (e.g., radio frequency) shielding, and/or (Ill) heat
exchangers (e.g.,
passive or active). For example, the housing may comprise one or more openings
(e.g.,
holes) that facilitate air flow past the circuit board. The housing may
comprise a heat sink.
The heat exchangers and/or shields may shield the circuitry from external
influences and/or
may shield between the circuit boards encapsulated in the housing. The housing
may
comprise an open body and a lid. The lid may comprise the one or more openings
(e.g.,
holes). The lid may snap into the open body to close the casing. The housing
may comprise
openings for receiving cabling.
[0197] Fig. 21A shows an example of a hard surface 2101 (e.g., a tintable
window) mounted
(e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within a frame 2102. The frame 2102
includes mullions
2103a and 2103b that are vertical, and transoms 2104a and 2104b (sometimes
referred to as
horizontal mullions). Two display constructs 2105a and 2105b are mounted
(e.g., via a hinge
and/or adhesive) within the frame 2102 and cover (e.g., all of) the viewable
surface of hard
surface 2101 (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of a window such as a
tintable window). Two
controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E-
)boxes) 2106a and
2106b are mounted in a portion of the frame 2102 within the upper (relative to
the gravitational
center towards which vector 2100 is pointing to) transom 2104a. The circuitry
in E-Box 2106a
(e.g., including timing controller, network communication (e.g., router),
and/or media related
circuitry) is connected via wiring 2109a to display construct 2105a. The
circuitry in E-Box
2106b is connected via wiring 2109b to display construct 2105b. The display
connectors
2108a extend from the housings 2106a in the same downward direction. The
display
connectors 2108b extend from the housings 2106b in the same downward
direction. The
connectors 2108a and 2108b are arranged to point to the same downward
direction. The
cables 2109a and are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box
2106a and 2106b
to the respective display constructs 2105a and 2105b, and extend within a
portion of the frame
2102. E-box 2106a is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power
supply cable
2110a. E-box 2106b is configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power
supply cable
2110b. At least one power supply cables supplying power to the E-Box circuitry
can connect
its own power supply sources. At least two power supply cables supplying power
to the E-Box
circuitry can connect one power supply source. Fig. 21A shows an example in
which two
power supply cables 2110a and 2110b connect to the same power supply source
2111. The
power supply cables 2110a and 2110b extend from each of the E-boxes (e.g.,
substantially)
perpendicular to the direction that the display connectors 2108a and 2108b
extend from the
E-boxes (e.g., the connectors extend to the same side of the E-box). Media
wiring 2112a
connect from a source of data (e.g., server) to the circuitry housed in the E-
box (e.g., media
76
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
circuitry board) 2106b. Media wiring 2112b is connected to E-box 2106a and
(via E-box 2106b)
to cable 2112a and to the source of data 2115. The media cables 2112a and
2112b can
connect to a media content provider server. The E-box may be operatively
coupled (e.g.,
wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one
controller that controls
that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, in
the event that the hard
surface 2101 is a tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-box may be
operatively coupled to
the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of this window,
e.g., via the media cables
(e.g., 2112a and/or 2112b) or via dedicated cables (not shown in Fig. 21A).
[0198] Fig. 21B shows an example of a hard surface 2121 (e.g., a tintable
window)
mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within a frame 2122. The frame
2122 includes
mullions 2123a and 2123b that are vertical, and transoms 2124a and 2124b
(sometimes
referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display constructs 2125a, 2125b,
2125c and 2125d
are mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within the frame 2122 and
cover all of the
viewable surface of hard surface 2121 (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of
a window such
as a tintable window). Four controllers housed within housings (also referred
to herein as
electrical (E)-boxes) 2126a, 2126b, 2126c and 2126d are mounted in a portion
of the frame
2122 within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which
vector 2120 is
pointing to) transom 2124a. The circuitry in E-Box 2126a (e.g., including
timing controller,
network and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2129a to
display construct
2125a. The circuitry in E-Box 2126b is connected via wiring 2129b to display
construct
2125b. The circuitry in E-Box 2126c (e.g., including timing controller and
media related
circuitry) is connected via wiring 2129c to display construct 2125c. The
circuitry in E-Box
2126d is connected via wiring 2129d to display construct 2125d. The display
connectors
2128a extend from the housings 2126a in the same downward direction. The
display
connectors 2128b extend from the housings 2126b in the same downward
direction. The
display connectors 2128c extend from the housings 2126c in the same downward
direction.
The display connectors 2128d extend from the housings 2126d in the same
downward
direction. The connectors 2128a, 2128b, 2128c and 2128d are arranged to point
to the same
downward direction. The cables 2129a and are (e.g., substantially) the same
length from
each E-box 2126a, 2126b, 2126c and 2126d to the respective display constructs
2125a,
2125b, 2125c and 2125d, and extend within a portion of the frame 2102. E-box
2126a is
configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130a. E-
box 2126b is
configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130b. E-
box 2126c is
configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130c. E-
box 2126d is
configured to connect (e.g., via a connector) to power supply cable 2130d. At
least one
power supply cables supplying power to the E-Box circuitry can connect its own
power
supply sources. At least two or more power supply cables supplying power to
the E-Box
circuitry can connect one power supply source. Fig. 21B shows an example in
which four
77
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
power supply cables 2130a, 2130b, 2130c and 2130d connect to the same power
supply
source 2131. The power supply cables 2130a, 2130b, 2130c and 2130d extend from
each of
the E-boxes (e.g., substantially) perpendicular to the direction that the
display connectors
2128a, 2128b, 2128c and 2128d extend from the E-boxes. Media wiring 2132a
connect from
a source of data (e.g., server) to the circuitry housed in the E-box (e.g.,
media circuitry
board) 2126d. Media wiring 2132b is connected to E-box 2126c and (via E-box
2126d) to
cable 2132a and to the source of data 2135. Media wiring 2132c is connected to
E-box
2126b and (via E-boxes 2126d and 2126c) to cable 2132a and to the source of
data 2135.
Media wiring 2132d is connected to E-box 2126a and (via E-boxes 2126d, 2126c
and
2126b) to cable 2132a and to the source of data 2135. The media cables 2132a,
2132b,
2132c and 2132d can connect to a media content provider server. The E-box may
be
operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is
coupled to at least
one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device within
the facility. For
example, in the event that the hard surface 2121 is a tintable window, any
(e.g., all) of the E-
box may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a
level of tint of
this window, e.g., via the media cables (e.g., 2132a, 2132b, 2132c and/or
2132d) or via
dedicated cables (not shown in Fig. 21B).
[0199] Fig. 22A shows an example of hard surfaces 2221a and 2221b (e.g.,
tintable
windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2222a and
2222b. The
frames 2222a and 2222b include mullions 2223 that are vertical, and transoms
2224
(sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Two display constructs 2225a,
2225b are
mounted within frame 2222a, and two display constructs 2225c and 2225d are
mounted
within the frame 2222b and cover all of the viewable surface of hard surfaces
2221a and
2221b (e.g., viable surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable
windows). Four
controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-
boxes) 2226a,
2226b, 2226c and 2226d are mounted in a portion of the frames 2222a and 2222b
within the
vertical side (relative to the gravitational center towards which vector 2220
is pointing to)
mullions 2223. The circuitry in E-Box 2226a (e.g., including timing controller
and media
related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2229a to display construct 2225a.
The circuitry in E-
Box 2226b is connected via wiring 2229b to display construct 2225b. The
circuitry in E-Box
2226c (e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media
related circuitry)
is connected via wiring 2229c to display construct 2225c. The circuitry in E-
Box 2226d is
connected via wiring 2229d to display construct 2225d. The display connectors
2228a,
2228b, 2228c and 2228d extend from the respective housings 2226a, 2226b, 2226c
and
2226d in the same horizontal direction. The connectors 2228a, 2228b, 2228c and
2228d are
arranged to point to the same horizontal direction. The cables 2229a, 2229b,
2229c, and
2229d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2226a, 2226b,
2226c and
2226d to the respective display constructs 2225a, 2225b, 2225c and 2225d, and
extend
78
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
within portions of the frames 2222a and 2222b. The E-boxes may be operatively
coupled
(e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one
controller that
controls that facility or any controllable device within the facility. For
example, in the event
that the hard surfaces 2221a and 2221b are one or more tintable windows, any
(e.g., all) of
the E-boxes may be operatively coupled to the at least one controller that
controls a level of
tint of these windows.
[0200] Fig. 22B shows an example of hard surfaces 2231a and 2231b (e.g.,
tintable
windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2232a and
2232b. The
frames 2232a and 2232b include mullions 2233 that are vertical, and transoms
2234
(sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). A display construct 2235a is
mounted within
frame 2232a, and a display construct 2235b is mounted within the frame 2232b
and cover all
of the viewable surface of hard surfaces 2231a and 2231b (e.g., viable surface
of a board, or
of a window such as tintable windows). Two controllers housed within housings
(also
referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2236a and 2236b are mounted in a
portion of the
frames 2232a and 2232b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center
towards which
vector 2230 is pointing to) transom 2234. The circuitry in E-Box 2236a (e.g.,
including timing
controller, network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected
via wiring 2239a
to display construct 2235a. The circuitry in E-Box 2236b is connected via
wiring 2239b to
display construct 2235h. The display connectors 2238a and 2238b extend from
the
respective housings 2236a and 2236b in the same downward direction. The
connectors
2238a and 2238b are arranged to point to the same downward direction. The
cables 2239a
and 2239b are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2236a and
2236b to the
respective display constructs 2235a and 2235b, and extend within portions of
the frames
2232a and 2232b. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly
and/or wired) to
the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that
facility or any
controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the
hard surfaces 2231a
and 2231b are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may
be
operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of
tint of these
windows.
[0201] Fig. 23 shows an example of hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b and 2321c (e.g.,
tintable
windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge such as 2370 and/or adhesive) within
frames 2322a,
2322b and 2322c. The frames 2322a, 2322b and 2322c include mullion 2323 that
is vertical,
and transoms 2324 (also referred to as horizontal mullion). Four display
constructs 2325a,
2325b, 2325c and 2325d are mounted within frame 2322a, two display constructs
2325e
and 2325f are mounted within the frame 2322b, and two display constructs 2325g
and
2325h are mounted within frame 2322c and may cover (e.g., substantially) all
(or only a
portion) of the viewable surface of respective hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b and
2321c (e.g.,
visible surface of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). For
example, surface
79
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
2380 of the tintable window is not covered by a display construct. Four
controllers housed
within housings (E-boxes) 2326a, 2326b, 2326c and 2326d are mounted in a
portion of the
frame 2322a within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards
which vector 2320
is pointing to) mullions 2323. The circuitry in E-Box 2326a is connected via
wiring 2329a to
display construct 2325a. The wiring may be configured to transmit data and/or
power (e.g.,
to the touch screen). The circuitry in E-Box 2326b is connected via wiring
2329b to display
construct 2325b. The circuitry in E-Box 2326c is connected via wiring 2329c to
display
construct 2325c. The circuitry in E-Box 2326d is connected via wiring 2329d to
display
construct 2325d. The display connectors 2328a, 2328b, 2328c and 2328d extend
from the
respective housings 2326a, 2326b, 2326c and 2326d in the same downward
direction. The
connectors 2328a, 2328b, 2328c and 2328d are arranged to point to the same
downward
direction. The cables 2329a, 2329b, 2329c, and 2329d are (e.g., substantially)
the same
length from each E-box 2326a, 2326b, 2326c and 2326d to the respective display
constructs
2325a, 2325b, 2325c and 2325d, and extend within portions of the frames 2322a.
The E-
boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the
network that is
coupled to at least one controller that controls that facility or any
controllable device within
the facility. For example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b
and 2321c are
one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be
operatively coupled to
the at least one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows. A
controller housed
within a housing 2330 is mounted in a portion of the frame 2322b within the
upper (relative to
the gravitational center towards which vector 2320 is pointing to) mullions
2323. The circuitry
in controller 2330 (e.g., including timing controller, network components
and/or media related
circuitry) is connected via wiring 2329e to display construct 2325e. The
circuitry in controller
2330 is connected via wiring 2329f to display construct 2325f. The circuitry
in controller 2330
(e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related
circuitry) is
connected via wiring 23299 to display construct 2325g. The circuitry in
controller 2330 is
connected via wiring 2329h to display construct 2325h. The cables 2329e,
2329f, 2329g,
and 2329h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2330 to
the respective
display constructs 2325e, 2325f, 2325g and 2325h, and extend within portions
of the frames
2322b and 2322c. The controllers 2330 may be operatively coupled (e.g.,
wirelessly and/or
wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls
that facility or any
controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the
hard surfaces 2321a,
2321b and 2321c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the
controller may be
operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of
tint of these
windows.
[0202] Fig. 24 shows an example of hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b and 2421c (e.g.,
tintable
windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2422a,
2422b and
2422c. The frames 2422a, 2422b and 2422c include mullions 2423 that are
vertical, and
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
transoms 2424 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display
constructs
2425a, 2425b, 2425c and 2425d are mounted within frame 2422a, two display
constructs
2425e and 2425f are mounted within the frame 2422b, and two display constructs
2425g
and 2425h are mounted within frame 2422c and may cover all (or only a portion)
of the
viewable surface of respective hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b and 2421c (e.g.,
visible surface
of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). Four controllers housed
within
housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2426a, 2426b, 2426c
and 2426d
are mounted in a portion of the frame 2422a within the upper (relative to the
gravitational
center towards which vector 2420 is pointing to) mullions 2423. The circuitry
in E-Box 2426a
(e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related
circuitry) is
connected via wiring 2429a to display construct 2425a. The circuitry in E-Box
2426b is
connected via wiring 2429b to display construct 2425b. The circuitry in E-Box
2426c (e.g.,
including timing controller, network components and/or media related
circuitry) is connected
via wiring 2429c to display construct 2425c. The circuitry in E-Box 2426d is
connected via
wiring 2429d to display construct 2425d. The cables 2429a, 2429b, 2429c, and
2429d are
(e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2426a, 2426b, 2426c and
2426d to the
respective display constructs 2425a, 2425b, 2425c and 2425d, and extend within
portions of
the frames 2422a. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly
and/or wired) to
the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that
facility or any
controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the
hard surfaces 2421a,
2421b and 2421c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-
boxes may be
operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of
tint of these
windows. A controller housed within a housing 2430 is mounted in a portion of
the frame
2422b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which
vector 2420 is
pointing to) mullions 2423. The circuitry in controller 2430 (e.g., including
timing controller,
network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring
2429e to display
construct 2425e. The circuitry in controller 2430 is connected via wiring
2429f to display
construct 2425f. The circuitry in controller 2430 (e.g., including timing
controller, network
components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2429g to
display
construct 2425g. The circuitry in controller 2430 is connected via wiring
2429h to display
construct 2425h. The cables 2429e, 2429f, 2429g, and 2429h are (e.g.,
substantially) the
same length from controller 2430 to the respective display constructs 2425e,
2425f, 2425g
and 2425h, and extend within portions of the frames 2422b and 2422c. The
controllers 2430
may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that
is coupled to at
least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device
within the facility. For
example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b and 2421c are one or
more
tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the controller may be operatively coupled
to the at least
one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.
81
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0203] Fig. 25 shows an example of hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b and 2521c (e.g.,
tintable
windows) mounted (e.g., via a hinge and/or adhesive) within frames 2522a,
2522b and
2522c. The frames 2522a, 2522b and 2522c include mullions 2523 that are
vertical, and
transoms 2524 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display
constructs
2525a, 2525b, 2525c and 2525d are mounted within frame 2522a, two display
constructs
2525e and 2525f are mounted within the frame 2522b, and two display constructs
2525g
and 2525h are mounted within frame 2522c and may cover all (or only a portion)
of the
viewable surface of respective hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b and 2521c (e.g.,
visible surface
of a board, or of a window such as tintable windows). Four controllers housed
within
housings (also referred to herein as electrical (E)-boxes) 2526a, 2526b, 2526c
and 2526d
are mounted in a portion of the frame 2522a within the upper (relative to the
gravitational
center towards which vector 2520 is pointing to) mullions 2523. The circuitry
in E-Box 2526a
(e.g., including timing controller, network components and/or media related
circuitry) is
connected via wiring 2529a to display construct 2525a. The circuitry in E-Box
2526b is
connected via wiring 2529b to display construct 2525b. The circuitry in E-Box
2526c (e.g.,
including timing controller, network components and/or media related
circuitry) is connected
via wiring 2529c to display construct 2525c. The circuitry in E-Box 2526d is
connected via
wiring 2529d to display construct 2525d. The cables 2529a, 2529h, 2529c, and
2529d are
(e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2526a, 2526b, 2526c and
2526d to the
respective display constructs 2525a, 2525b, 2525c and 2525d, and extend within
portions of
the frames 2522a. The E-boxes may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly
and/or wired) to
the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls that
facility or any
controllable device within the facility. For example, in the event that the
hard surfaces 2521a,
2521b and 2521c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-
boxes may be
operatively coupled to the at least one controller that controls a level of
tint of these
windows. A controller housed within a housing 2530 is mounted in a portion of
the frame
2522b within the upper (relative to the gravitational center towards which
vector 2520 is
pointing to) mullions 2523. The circuitry in controller 2530 (e.g., including
timing controller,
network components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring
2529e to display
construct 2525e. The circuitry in controller 2530 is connected via wiring
2529f to display
construct 2525f. The circuitry in controller 2530 (e.g., including timing
controller, network
components and/or media related circuitry) is connected via wiring 2529g to
display
construct 2525g. The circuitry in controller 2530 is connected via wiring
2529h to display
construct 2525h. The cables 2529e, 2529f, 2529g, and 2529h are (e.g.,
substantially) the
same length from controller 2530 to the respective display constructs 2525e,
2525f, 2525g
and 2525h, and extend within portions of the frames 2522b and 2522c. The
controllers 2530
may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the network that
is coupled to at
least one controller that controls that facility or any controllable device
within the facility. For
82
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
example, in the event that the hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b and 2521c are one or
more
tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the controller may be operatively coupled
to the at least
one controller that controls a level of tint of these windows.
[0204] In some embodiments, one or more controllers in housings ((E)-boxes)
provides
functionality to one or more display constructs. The E-box may have a cover
bracket that
may be secured to a mounting bracket. The cover bracket and mounting bracket
may mount
within a portion of a window frame and/or to other structure. The E box may
have a length,
width, and height. The length of the E-box may be at most 15 inch ("), 14",
13", 12", 11,01
10". The length of the E-box may have any value between the aforementioned
values (e.g.,
between about 15" and 10", e.g., about 12.5". The width of the E-box may be at
most 5 inch
("), 4", 3.5", 3", 2.5", 2", or 1.5". The width of the E-box may have any
value between the
aforementioned values (e.g., between about 5" and 1.5", e.g., about 3.75". The
height of the
E-box may be at most 3", 2.5", 2", 1.5", or 1". The height of the E-box may
have any value
between the aforementioned values (e.g., between about 3" and 1", e.g., 1.75".
The E-box
may include an analog-to-digital converter circuit board, which may mount to
one or both of
the cover bracket and mounting bracket. The circuit board may include
terminals for
connecting to a power supply (e.g., AC or DC electrical source) via cables,
which provide
electric power to the E-box, the circuit board may include at least one data
input
connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector
for data
transmission), which may receive data for display on an associated display
construct, and
may include at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI,
Ethernet or other type
of connector for data transmission), which may transmit data to another E-box.
The E-box
may include a controller board, which may operatively engage the circuit
board. The circuit
board may comprise geo-location technology such as Bluetooth, radio frequency
(e.g.,
ultrawideband radio), or global positioning system (GPS). The controller board
may include a
timing controller, network components, and/or media related circuitry. The
timing controller
may be employed for precise coordination of the timing altering various
positions (e.g.,
LEDs) in the display construct. The controller board may include connectors
that connect to
cabling, which may connect to a display construct. The cabling may transmit
data between
the E-box and the display construct. The connectors from the e-box to the
display
construction (e.g., transmitting power and/or data) may extend in the same
direction from the
E-box or may extend from the E-box in different directions. For example, all
power
connectors from the E-box to the display construct may extend to the same
direction and
emerge from the same side of the E-box and/or PCB disposed therein. For
example, all
communication connectors from the E-box to the display construct may extend to
the same
direction and emerge from the same side of the E-box and/or PCB disposed
therein. The
power connectors supplying power from the PCB of the E-box to the display
construct may
reside on the same PCB side as the data connectors from the PCB of the E-box
to the
83
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
display construct (e.g., and extend to the same direction, e.g., towards the
display construct
and away from the E-box). The connectors of data and/or power between the E-
box and the
display construct, may reside in the E-box at a first side that has an angle
(is perpendicular)
to a second side of that E-Box in which the connectors for the incoming power
supply cables
reside. The connectors of data and/or power between the E-box and the display
construct,
may reside in the E-box at a first side that has an angle (is perpendicular)
to a third side of
that E-Box in which the connectors for the incoming data and/or media
communication
cables reside. The connector for (i) incoming power supply, (ii) incoming data
(e.g., media)
communication, and (iii) power and/or data to the display construct reside,
may or may not
reside on one PCB. The E-box may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly
and/or wired) to
the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls a
facility or any controllable
device within the facility. The E-box may have a unique network identifier
(ID), e.g., for
communication with the at least one controller that controls the facility.
[0205] In some embodiments, a plurality of cabling extends from
the E-box to the display
construct. the cabling is connected via connectors to the circuitry in the E-
box. The circuitry
can be in one or more printed circuit boards (PCBs). The cabling may be
connector to the
circuit boar via connectors. The connectors may connect a plurality of wires
bundled into a
cable. The number of connectors may be at least 2, 4, 6, or 8. The number of
connectors
may be an even number. The cabling may have the same of different
functionality. The
functionality can include transmission of data and/or transmission of
electricity (e.g.,
electrical power). For example, a connector may connect cabling that transmits
data from the
PCB to the display construct. For example, a connector may connect cabling
that transmits
electricity from the PCB to the display construct. The connectors may form two
groups of
connectors. The members of the connector groups may be identical or different.
For
example, a connector group may comprise a data connector and a power
connector.
Respective arrangement of the connector types in the groups of connectors may
follow a
mirror symmetry, inversion symmetry, and/or rotational (e.g., C2) symmetry.
The mirror,
rotational axis, and/or inversion point for the applicable symmetry operation
may be
disposed between the two connector groups.
[0206] Fig. 26 shows an exploded view of an example of a controller in a
housing (E-box)
2602. The E-box 2602 has a cover bracket 2603 that is secured to a mounting
bracket 2604.
The cover bracket 2603 has a plurality of slits 2620 (e.g., for ventilation
and/or heat
exchange). The cover bracket 2602 and mounting bracket 2604 may mount within a
portion
of a window frame (not shown in this figure) or to other structure (e.g.,
fixture). The E-box
2602 includes an analog-to-digital converter circuit board 2605, which may
mount to one or
both of the cover bracket 2603 and the mounting bracket 2604. The circuit
board 2605 may
include terminals 2606 for connecting to (e.g., AC) power supply cables, which
provide
electric power to the E-box 2602, at least one data input connector(s) (e.g.,
Display port,
84
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission) 2607, which
may receive
data for display on an associated display construct, and at least one E-box
connector(s)
(e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data
transmission) 2608,
which may transmit data to another E-box. The E-box 2602 includes a controller
board 2610,
which operatively engages the circuit board 2605. The controller board 2610
may include a
timing controller and/or media related circuitry. The timing controller may be
employed for
(e.g., precise) coordination of the timing altering various positions (e.g.,
LEDs) of the display
construct. The circuit board (e.g., controller board) 2610 includes connectors
(e.g., 2611)
that connect to cabling 2612a-f, which connects to a display construct. The
cabling 2612a-f
may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 2602 and the display
construct. For
example, some of the cabling 2612a-f can transmit data and some of the cabling
can
transmit power. For example, the two outer most cabling 2612c and 2612f can
transmit
power, and the four inner cabling 2612e, 2612d, 2612a, and 2612b can transmit
data. For
example, the two inner most cabling 2612d and 2612a can transmit power, and
the four
outer cabling 2612e, 2612f, 2612c, and 2612b can transmit data. For example,
the two
intermediate cabling 26123 and 2612b can transmit power, and the four other
cabling 2612d,
2612f, 2612c, and 2612a can transmit data. Two of the cabling 2612a-f can
transit power
and four of the cabling 2612a-f can transmit data. The connectors may extend
in the same
direction from the E-box or may extend from the E-box in different directions.
In the example
shown in Fig. 26, the connectors 2611 extend in the same direction from the E-
box 2602.
The connectors may extend from the E-box at a right angle from the direction
that the (e.g.,
AC) power supply cables extend or may extend at any other angle from the
direction that the
power supply cables extend. The E-box may be operatively coupled (e.g.,
wirelessly and/or
wired) to the network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls
a facility or any
controllable device within the facility. The E-box may have a unique network
ID for
communication with the at least one controller that controls the facility.
[0207] Figs. 27A and 27B show various views of an assembled E-box 2702 shown
in Fig.
26 as an exploded view. The E-box 2702 has a cover bracket 2703 that is
secured to a
mounting bracket 2704. The cover bracket 2702 and mounting bracket 2704 may
mount
within a portion of a window frame (not shown in this figure) or to other
structure. The E-box
2702 may have dimensions (e.g., as disclosed herein) for fitting within a
structure (e.g., a
length 2730, a width 2731, and a thickness 2732). The structure may be any
structure
disclosed herein. The E-box 2702 includes a (e.g., an analog-to-digital
converter) circuit
board 2705, which may mount to one or both of the cover bracket 2703 and the
mounting
bracket 2704. The circuit board 2705 includes terminals 2706 for connecting to
(e.g., AC)
power supply cables 2715, which provide electric power to the E-box 2702, at
least one data
input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of
connector for data
transmission) 2707, which may receive data for display on an associated
display construct,
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
and at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet or
other type of
connector for data transmission) 2708, which transmit data via cables 2716,
e.g., to another
E-box or to the network. The E-box 2702 includes a controller board 2710,
which operatively
engages the circuit board 2705. The controller board 2710 may include a timing
controller
and media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for precise
coordination
of the timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) in the display
construct. The controller
board 2710 includes connectors 2711 that connect to cabling 2712, which
connects to a
display construct. The cabling 2712 may transmit data and/or power between the
E-box
2702 and the display construct. The connectors 2711 extend in the same
direction from the
E-box 2702.
[0208] Fig. 32 shows an example of an exploded view of an E-box 3202. The E-
box 3202
has a cover bracket 3203 that is secured to a mounting bracket 3204. The cover
bracket
3202 and mounting bracket 3204 may mount within a portion of a structure such
as a fixture,
e.g., a window frame (not shown in this figure). The E-box 3202 may have
dimensions
consistent with fitting the E-box 3202 into a portion of the structure or may
have other
dimensions that are larger or smaller than these dimensions (e.g., as
disclosed herein). The
E-box 3202 includes a (e.g., an analog-to-digital converter) circuit board
3205, which may
mount to one or both of the cover bracket 3203 and the mounting bracket 3204.
The circuit
board 3205 may include one or more terminal(s) 3206 for connecting to (e.g.,
AC) power
supply cable(s), which provide electric power to the E-box 3202 (e.g., via a
coaxial cable), at
least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or
other type of
connector for data transmission) 3207, which may receive data for display on
an associated
display construct, and at least one E-box connector (e.g., Display port, HDMI,
Ethernet
and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3208, which may transmit
data to
another E-box and/or to the network. The E-box 3202 includes a (e.g.,
controller) circuit
board 3210, which operatively engages the circuit board 3205. The circuit
board 3210 may
include a timing controller, network components, and/or media related
circuitry. The timing
controller may be employed for precise coordination of the timing altering
various positions
(e.g., LEDs) in the display construct. The circuit board 3210 includes
connectors 3211a-f that
connect to cabling (e.g., 3212), which connect in turn to a display construct.
The cabling
3212 may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 3202 and the display
construct.
The E-box 3202 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to
the network
that is coupled to at least one controller that controls a facility or any
controllable device of
the facility. The E-box 3202 may have a unique network ID for communication
with the at
least one controller that controls the facility.
[0209] Figs. 33A through 33D show various views of an E-box. The E-box 3302
has a
cover bracket 3303 that is secured to a mounting bracket 3304. The cover
bracket 3303 and
mounting bracket 3304 may mount within a structure or a portion of the
structure (e.g., a
86
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
fixture such as a window frame (not shown in this figure)). The E-box 3302 may
have
dimensions for mounting within the structure (e.g., having a length 3330, a
width 3331, and a
thickness 3332), e.g., any dimensions disclosed herein. The E-box 3302
includes a (e.g., an
analog-to-digital converter) first circuit board, which may mount to one or
both of the cover
bracket 3303 and the mounting bracket 3304. The first circuit board includes
one or more
terminal(s) (e.g., 3306) for connecting to (e.g., AC) power supply cables
(e.g., comprising
coaxial cable or twisted wire), which provide electric power to the E-box
3302; one or more
data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type
of connector for
data transmission) 3307, which may receive data for display on an associated
display
construct, and one or more E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI,
Ethernet and/or
other type of connector for data transmission) 3308, which may transmit data
to another E-
box. The E-box 3302 includes a second (e.g., controller) circuit board 3305,
which
operatively engages the first circuit board. In some embodiments, the first
circuit board and
the second circuit board are one circuit board (e.g., and reside on the same
or on different
sides of the circuit board). In some embodiments, the first circuit board and
the second
circuit board are separate circuit boards, that are separated by a distance
that facilitates heat
exchange and/or shielding (e.g., electronic and/or electromagnetic (e.g.,
radio frequency)
shielding). The heat exchanger and/or shield may comprise elemental metal or
metal alloy.
The heat exchanger may exchange heat passively and/or actively. The heat
exchanger may
comprise a heat pipe, a slab, or a mesh. The heat exchanger may comprise a
heat sink. The
second circuit board 3305 may include a timing controller, network components,
and/or
media related circuitry. The timing controller may be employed for precise
coordination of the
timing altering various positions (e.g., LEDs) in the display construct. In
the example shown
in Figs. 33A-D, the second circuit board includes one or more connector(s)
3311 that
connect to cabling 3312, which in turn connects to a display construct. The
cabling 3312
may transmit data and/or power between the E-box 3302 and the display
construct. There
may be additional cabling connecting the E-box with the display construct (not
shown). The
E-box 3302 may be operatively coupled (e.g., wirelessly and/or wired) to the
network that is
coupled to at least one controller that controls a facility or any
controllable device within the
facility. The E-box 3302 may have a unique network ID for communication with
the at least
one controller that controls the facility.
[0210] Fig. 34A through 34E show various view examples of circuit board 3405,
which
may mount to within an E-box. The circuit board 3405 may include one or more
terminal(s)
3406 for connecting to AC power supply cable(s), which provide electric power
to the circuit
board 3405, at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display port, HDMI,
Ethernet and/or
other type of connector for data transmission) 3407, which may receive data
for display on
an associated display construct, and at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g.,
Display port,
HDMI, Ethernet and/or other type of connector for data transmission) 3408,
which may
87
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
transmit data to another E-box. The circuit board 3405 may operatively engage
a controller
board, which may include a timing controller and media related circuitry, and
connectors that
connect to cabling, which connects to a display construct.
[0211] In some embodiments, certain apparatus, non-transitory
computer readable media,
and/or methods described herein comprise techniques that pass gas (e.g., air)
over at least
one lite of a tintable window. The tintable window may comprise an insulated
glass unit, e.g.,
a tinted electrochromic coated lite of an IGU. Passing of the gas (e.g., air)
may be in order to
remove heat and/or lessen the heat load on the lite, e.g., and any optically
switchable device
(e.g., electrochromic coating) on the substrate of the lite, and/or other
components (e.g.,
display construct). Passing the gas (e.g., air) may be for removal of heat
via, e.g.,
convection. The heat may be removed via conduction and/or radiation. In some
embodiments, gas that has been heated by and/or through the IGU lite may be
passed such
as by pumping, pushing and/or suction. The flow of gas may be to the internal
environment
of the facility and/or to the exterior of the facility (e.g., building) having
the IGU lite. For
example, the heated gas may be used to warm the interior of the facility. In
some
embodiments, the heated gas may be used to drive a turbine to generate
electricity. The
electricity thus generated may be stored in a battery on the forced air window
assembly.
[0212] In some embodiments, a forced gas tintable (e.g.,
electrochromic) window may
comprise two or more vent modules in communication with an interior space
between an
electrochromic lite of an IGU subassembly and a third lite. In some cases, one
or more of
these vent modules may comprise one or more air movement devices, e.g., one or
more
fans, for actively moving the gas (e.g., air) through the interior space
between an
electrochromic lite and a third lite. In one case, the one or more air
movement devices (e.g.,
fans) may comprise one of a blade fan, a bladeless fan, or an air pump. In
some cases, one
or more air movement devices from the structure and outside the forced air
tintable window
may be configured to feed air into one or more of the vent modules or output
air from one or
more of the vent modules. In certain embodiments, the vented air may be used
to generate
electricity by turning a turbine connected to a generator. The generated
electricity may be
stored in a battery, e.g., in one of the venting modules. Examples of forced
air tintable
windows, their usage, and control thereof can be found in PCT/US15/14453 (WO
2015/120045A1), filed on February 4, 2015, titled "Forced Air Smart Windows,"
which is
incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[0213] Fig. 28 shows an example of a display construct 2801 coupled to a
fastener 2802,
which display construct is framed by sensor and emitter panels, e.g., 2803.
The display
construct is coupled (e.g., via wiring and/or cabling not shown in fig. 28) to
an E-box 2811
and to a power source 2810. The E-box and the power source can be disposed
adjacent to
the display construct, or further away, e.g., as disposed herein (e.g., in a
fixture cavity such
as in window frame, or in a wall cavity). The fastener 2802 includes a hinge
having a first
88
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
leaf 2821 comprising a bracket, and a second leaf 2822, coupled by a knuckles
and pintle
arrangement. The fastener 2802 includes a gas guide 2823 (partial view shown)
that
facilitates directional flow of gas through a set of fans 2805 coupled to
respective holes in
leaf portion 2821 (partial view shown). The gas directing components is
configured to attach
a circuit board 2830 having connectors 2831 that connect the circuit board to
the display
construct 2801. The circuit board may comprise a controller and/or a driver
board.
[0214] In some embodiments, a display construct includes touch
screen functionality. In
some embodiments, a plurality of display constructs may be arranged adjacent
to each other
(e.g., to form a display wall such as a video wall). The display constructs
may be arranged in
a matrix (also called herein group or set of display constructs). There may be
a gap between
two immediately adjacent display constructs. Immediately adjacent display
constructs
exclude another display construct therebetween. The gap may be masked or
unmasked.
The gap masking may comprise a flexible filler such as a transparent polymer
and/or resin.
The flexible filler may comprise a carbon-based or a silicon-based polymer or
resin. The filler
may comprise an optical grade material. The filler may polymerize and/or cure
by mixing at
least two components. At least one of the at least two component and/or the
filler may have
a viscosity of at least about 400 millipascals second (mPa*s), 1000 mPa*s,
2000 mPa*s,
3000 mPa*s, 5000 mPa*s, 6000 mPa*s, 7000 mPa*s, 8000 mPa*s, 9000 mPa*s,
10000mPa*s, 25000mPa*s, or 50000mPa*s. The density of the filler may be at
least about
0.9 grams per centimeter cubed (g/cm3), 0.95 g/cm3, 0.97 g/cm3, 0.98 g/cm3, or
0.99 g/cm3.
The filler may have low shrinkage after curing (e.g., shrinkage of at most
about 0.2%, 0.1%,
or 0.5% volume per volume after curing relative to before curing). The filler
may have a
dielectric constant of at most about 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, or 2.9. the filler
may have a dielectric
constant between any of the aforementioned dielectric constants (e.g., from
2.5 to 2.9, or
from 2.7 to 2.8). The filler may be optically clear (e.g., to an average
human). The filler may
have a pulls strength of at least 2 Kilogram force per centimeter squared
(Kgf/cm2), 2.2
Kgf/cm2, 2.5 Kgf/cm2,3 Kgf/cm2, 3.5 Kgf/cm2, 4.0 Kgf/cm2, 4.5 Kgf/cm2, 5.0
Kgf/cm25.5
Kgf/cm2, or 6 Kgf/cm2. The filler may have a transmittance of at least about
98%, 98.5, 99%,
99.2%, 99.4%, or 99.5% of the (e.g., visible) light. The filler may have a
refractive index of at
most about 1.9, 1.7, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, or 1.3, e.g., at 25 C, at 23 C, or at 20
C. For example, the
filler may be a Wacker Lumisil (WL) filler (e.g., of the WL 100, 200, or 300
series). The
flexible filler may be configured to allow for expansion and/or contraction of
the displays
(e.g., due to temperature change). The flexible filler may be configured to
bind the
immediately adjacent display to each other and/or to a structure. The
structure may be a
tintable window, board, or wall. A mounting bracket and/or hinge may be
secured to the
display construct and may mount to a structure. The structure may comprise a
frame or wall
portion. The structure may comprise a fixture. The frame may comprise a
vertical mullion
and a horizontal mullion (transom). The fixture (e.g., frame) may be mounted
(e.g., bonded,
89
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
fastened and/or by other attachment means) to various surfaces (e.g., a wall,
a board, glass
internal to a facility and/or other mounting location). In some embodiments,
the display
construct may be directly attached to the structure (e.g., tintable window).
Direct attachment
may be using the polymer and/or resin. Direct attachment may be using bonding.
The
bonding may utilize an adhesive polymer and/or resin (e.g., as disclosed
herein). The
bonding material may have a state in which it is more malleable than the other
(e.g., rigid)
state. The rigid state may be prevalent at ambient conditions. The malleable
state may be in
specific controllable conditions that differ from ambient conditions. The
change between
malleable and rigid states may be triggered by external stimulus (e.g., heat,
magnetic field,
electric field, and/or chemical stimulus). For example, the filler (e.g.,
adhesive polymer
and/or resin) may be heat sensitive. For example, the filler may be more
malleable in a non-
ambient condition (e.g., in a heated environment), e.g., and facilitates
detachment of the
display construct(s) from their supporting structure (e.g., for maintenance or
exchange).
Division between the display constructs and/or touch screens in the set may be
masked,
e.g., due to the proximity of the display constructs and lack of emitter-
sensor panel between
two immediately adjacent display constructs. The flexible filler may be
disposed between two
immediately adjacent display constructs.
[0215] In some embodiments, the display construct may be fastened to a side
bracket.
The side bracket may be fastened to a structure (e.g., fixture such as a frame
portion or a
wall). The side bracket may be secured to the display construct (e.g., via an
adhesive and/or
screws). The side bracket is operatively coupled to at least one pair (e.g.,
two pair) of an
emitter panel and a sensor panel. A first sensor and emitter panel pair may be
disposed
orthogonal to a second sensor and emitter panel pair. The two orthogonal
sensor and
emitter panel pairs may facilitate operation of at least one touch screen.
[0216] In some embodiments, a plurality of display constructs is
arranged to form a
display construct wall. The display construct wall may or may not comprise
touch screen
capability. For example, at least one (e.g., all) display construct in the
display construct wall
may have touch screen capability. A touch screen may be facilitated by at
least one pair of
sensor and emitter panels. A touch screen may comprise two orthogonal pairs of
sensor and
emitters, e.g., arranged orthogonally (e.g., as disclosed herein). A distance
between an
emitter panel and its sensor panel may span one or more display constructs.
The display
constructs may be disposed in a matrix arrangement (e.g., in a 2x2 display
constructs may
form a display construct set). In some embodiments, at least one (e.g., each)
display
construct in the set comprises its dedicated touch screen having at least one
set (e.g., two
sets) of sensor and emitter panel. In some embodiments, at least two display
constructs in
the set comprises its dedicated touch screen having at least one set (e.g.,
two sets) of
sensor and emitter panel. Signal from an emitter in the emitter panel travels
until it reaches a
sensor in the sensor panel. If a signal does not reach the sensor, then the
touch screen
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
controller may interpret such disturbance as a touch of the touch screen.
Thus, the path
between the emitter and the sensor should not be unintentionally disturbed.
[0217] In some embodiments, the display construct and/or set of
display constructs is
(e.g., substantially) planar. The tolerance for planarity variation of the
display construct be
limited (e.g., to facilitate operation of the sensor-emitter panels disposed
adjacent to the
display construct). The tolerance for planarity variation between the display
constructs in the
set may be limited (e.g., to facilitate operation of the sensor-emitter panels
disposed
adjacent to the display construct set). The variation from planarity may be
stricter towards a
viewer than away from the viewer. The variation from planarity may be stricter
towards a
side of the display construct adjacent to which the touch screen is disposed
(e.g., the sensor
and emitter panel are disposed). For example, the display construct can be
convex toward
the viewer and/or touch screen with a deviation of a predetermined distance or
less. The
display construct can be convex away from the viewer and/or touch screen by
more than
that predetermined distance. The touch screen may be configured to show
display data as if
a single display construct (e.g., one media that is respectively parceled
among the displays
in a display set such that each display in the set displays a portion of the
screen image). A
user may use a selector (e.g., cursor and/or a touch screen) to control the
plurality of display
constructs as if the set of display constructs was a single display. The
tolerance may allow
planarity deviation of any display construct disposed between the sensor-
emitter panel by at
most about 100 micrometers ( m), 300p,m, 500p,m, 700p,m, or 900p,m. The
planarity
deviation limit may be in the direction towards the sensor-emitter panel. The
display
construct may be a (e.g., slightly) concave, convex, or rippled display (e.g.,
within the
tolerance mentioned herein). The gap between two immediately adjacent display
may be at
most about 0.1 inches ("), 0.2", 0.3", 0.4", or 0.5". The gap may have any
value between the
aforementioned values (e.g., from about 0.1" to about 0.5"). The display
construct set may
have a glass panel that is common to a plurality of displays (e.g., TOLEDS).
The display
constructs can each have a glass panel that is supports the display (e.g.,
TOLED)
[0218] Figs. 29A-29D show examples of various display constructs including
touch screen
functionality. Fig. 29A shows an example of four displays (e.g., OLEDs) 2903a,
2903b,
2903c and 2903d sandwiched between a front glass 2904 (that may be tempered)
that is
common to the four displays and four back glass panels (e.g., 2905) that each
individually
supports a display. The displays together form a display construct set. The
four displays in
Fig. 29A and 29B are arranged as a two by two matrix (also called herein group
or set) with
a gap (e.g., 2915) between two immediately adjacent displays. The gap 2915 may
be
masked (e.g., by a flexible filler such as a transparent polymer and/or resin
disposed
between the displays (e.g., to allow for expansion and contraction of the
displays due to
temperature and/or to bond the display constructs and/or glass panels
together)). A sensor-
91
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
emitter panel 2918 is secured to the display construct 2902 and mounts to a
framing cap
2919. The display construct is secured with a hinge (not shown) to a structure
that is a
window frame 2906 having a vertical mullions 2907 and horizontal mullions 2908
(transom).
The frame 2906 may be mounted (e.g., bonded) to various surfaces (e.g., a
wall, a board,
glass internal to a facility or other mounting location). The bonding may be
with an adhesive
polymer and/or resin, which may or may not have a state in which it is more
malleable than
the other (e.g., rigid) state, which rigid state may be prevalent at ambient
conditions. Figs
29A shows an example of a side framing cap 2910 that is configured to secure
the sensor-
emitter panel to the display construct 2902 a side 2920 of the display
construct set, with the
sensor and emitter panel configured to operate as a touch screen. The set of
displays
2903a-2903d has two sets of sensor-emitter panels that are normal to each
other, which
sensor-emitter panels border the set of display constructs (rather than
bordering each of the
displays). The tolerance for height differences between the displays 2903a-
2903d in the
display construct 2902 may be limited (e.g., none of the displays can protrude
at most a
tolerance threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein) from the sensor-emitter panel
towards the
viewer), so that the signal from the emitter will be able to reach
unobstructed the sensor on
the opposite side of the display construct set (e.g., the display within the
set cannot be
convex toward the viewer with a deviation of more than the tolerance threshold
but may be
concave away from the viewer by more than the tolerance threshold).
[0219] In some embodiments, a fastener is configured to couple the
display construct to a
supporting structure. The display construct may or may not be equipped with
touch screen
capability. The supporting structure can be a fixture. For example, the
supporting structure
can be a frame portion of a window (e.g., tintable window). The structure can
be any
structure disclosed herein (e.g., a wall, an arch, a door frame, or any other
structural frame).
In some embodiments, the fastener comprises a hinge configured to allow
swiveling (e.g., of
the coupled display construct) about its axis. The fastener may comprise a
movable joint
(e.g., a hinge). The fastener may allow swinging of at least one of its
portions about an axis.
The fastener may comprise a mechanical bearing that connects two solid
objects. At least
one of the solid objects can swing about an axis (e.g., pin, pintle, or rod,
e.g., cylindrical rod).
The swinging motion may be to a limited angle of rotation between the two
solid portions
(e.g., hinge leaves). The angle may be at most about 270 degrees ( ), 180 ,
900,600, 450,
or 300. The angle may facilitate reaching any circuitry and/or (e.g.,
electrical) connections
coupled to the fastener. The angle may facilitate attaching and/or detaching
the display
construct from the fastener. The angle may facilitate attaching and/or
detaching the fastener
to the supporting structure. The fastener may comprise a barrel hinge, butt
hinge, Mortise
hinge, concealed hinge (e.g., cup hinge or euro hinge), continuous hinge
(e.g., piano hinge),
flag hinge, H-Hinge, HL hinge, pivot hinge (e.g., double acting hinge), self-
closing hinge,
spring hinge, or living hinge (e.g., devoid of knuckles or pins). The
swiveling may be of the
92
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
hinge leaves (e.g., any anything attached to the hinge leaves). The hinge axis
may be of the
same material as the fastener body (e.g., hinge leaves), or of a different
material. For
example, the hinge axis can be of a harder material as compared to the hinge
body (e.g.,
hinge leaves). The hinge axis and/or leaves can comprise metal (e.g., comprise
elemental
metal or metal alloy). The fastener may include knuckles and/or an axis (e.g.,
a pin). At least
one hinge leaf (e.g., each of the two hinge leaves) may comprise a second
class lever or a
third class lever that pivots about a fulcrum disposed at one of its sides.
The fulcrum is the
point on which the lever rests and/or is supported, and about which the lever
pivots (e.g., the
hinge axis). For example, the hinge leaf may pivot about a fulcrum disposed at
the hinge
axis. In a second class lever, the load is located between the fulcrum and the
input force. In
a third class lever, the input force is between the fulcrum and the load. The
leaf may extend
from a set of knuckles that hold the hinge axis. For example, the fastener may
comprise two
sets of knuckles and/or two pins. The knuckles may be part of the leaf of the
fastener (e.g.,
an integral part of the leaf, made of the same material piece). Any part of
the hinge may
comprise a composite material (e.g., comprising carbon fiber). The hinge may
comprise a
ceramic material. The hinge may be made of a heat conductive material such as
metal (e.g.,
copper and/or aluminum). The metal may comprise an elemental metal or a metal
alloy. The
hinge axis (e.g., pintle) can be of a durable material. The durable material
may comprise
stainless steel, titanium, plane steel, iron, Inconel, Hastelloy, Waspaloy,
Rene alloy, lncoloy,
MP98T, TMS alloy, or CMSX single crystal alloy. The durable material may
comprise a
superalloy (e.g., high performance alloy). The hinge (e.g., any of its
components such as its
axis (e.g., pintle)) can comprise the durable material (e.g., superalloy). The
knuckle of the
hinge may have a hollow cylindrical cavity (e.g., having a circular cross
section). The cavity
may form the joint of the hinge through which the hinge axis is set. The
knuckles of
either leaf can alternate and interlock with the axis (e.g., pintle) passing
through the
knuckles. The knuckle can form a closed cylindrical cavity. The knuckle can
form an open
cavity. Fig. 37 shows an example of a hinge leaf 3721 having knuckle (e.g.,
3781) that forms
an open cavity configure to accommodate the hinge axis 3720. The open cavity
of the
knuckle facilitates attachment and/or detachment of its leaf (e.g., 3721) from
the axis. In the
knuckle example having an open cavity, the knuckle may separate from the
pintle by (i)
moving the knuckles away from the pintle in a direction normal to the pintle
(e.g., and in the
direction opposite to the chuckle cavity opening (e.g., 3782) that extends
along the pintle
axis, and/or (ii) extracting the pintle by moving it along its axis. Fig. 36
shows an example of
a knuckle 3682 having a closed cylindrical cavity through which axis (e.g.,
pintle) 3620
traverses. In a closed knuckle example, the pintle may be able to move (i)
along its axis
(e.g., 3683) and in a circular motion about its axis. In a closed knuckle
scenario, the knuckle
may detach from the pintle by extracting the pintle by moving it along its
axis (e.g., 3683).
93
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0220] In some embodiments, a plane of the hinge leaf face is
(e.g., substantially) planar.
In some embodiments, a plane of the hinge leaf face is devoid of curvature
(e.g., concave,
convex, or rippled). Fig. 40 shows perspective view examples of hinge leaf
4021 having a
planar hinge leaf face surface 4021a. Fig. 41 shows an example of hinge leaf
4122 having a
planar hinge leaf face surface 4122a (partial view shown).
[0221] In some embodiments the fastener is configured to accommodate various
components. The fastener (e.g., comprising the hinge) may be configured to
accommodate
one or more circuity boards. For example, the fastener may be configured to
accommodate
a circuit board comprising a booster and/or driver board for the display to
which it is
configured to connect to. For example, the fastener may be configured to
accommodate a
circuit board of the touch screen functionality (e.g., sensor and emitter
panels). The fastener
may be configured to allow easy installation, removal, and/or maintenance
(e.g., as
disclosed herein). Easy may refer to low labor cost, low labor grade (e.g.,
low labor
qualification), and/or short labor time. At least one of the hinge leaves can
comprise an
opening through which at least a portion of the circuitry (e.g., PCB) is
viewable and/or
accessible. At least one of the hinge leaves may be configure to facility
viewing, access to,
and/or manipulation of, at least one connector. For example, at least some of
the connectors
in the circuitry (or coupled to the circuitry) can be viewable, accessible,
and/or manipulatable
through the opening. For example, at least some of the connectors between the
circuitry and
the display construct can be viewable and/or accessible through the opening.
The opening
may facilitate removal of cable(s) coupled to the connector. The opening may
facilitate
attachment and detachment of the cables, e.g., for maintenance, replacement,
and/or
removal (e.g., of the cabling, of the circuitry, and/or of the display
construct). The fastener
may snap and/or be screwed to the structure. The circuit board may engage
(e.g., via a snap
fit) into the fastener, attached to the fastener (e.g., using an adhesive), or
snap to the
fastener. At times, the display construct may require replacement before
replacement of any
portion of the support structure (e.g., and/or tintable glass) to which it is
coupled. The
fastener may or may not have magnetic components. The fastener may be coupled
to a
supporting structure. The fastener may or may not be attached to a window. The
fastener
may or may not be bolted into a window (e.g., using through holes in the
window). In some
embodiments, the fastener is not directly coupled to the window (e.g., using
any through
holes in the window and/or using an adhesive). In some embodiments, the
display construct
is not directly coupled to the window (e.g., using any through holes in the
window and/or
using an adhesive).
[0222] Fig. 35 shows example views of a fastener 3502 that is coupled to a
display
construct 3501 bordered by sensor-emitter panels housed in a protective
framing such as
3503 to facilitate touch screen capability. The fastener 3502 has an opening
3504 through
which a portion of a circuit board 3530 can be viewed. The circuit board can
incorporate a
94
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
booster and/or driver board coupled with the display emitters (e.g., LEDs).
The circuit board
3530 comprises six connectors 3509. The connectors can facilitate
transmittance of data
(including media and/or control related data) and/or power from the power
source and/or E-
Box (compositing the circuit board (e.g., timing controller)) to the display
construct. The
fastener may comprise a hinge axis 3520 coupled to hinge leaves 3521 and 3522.
A first
hinge leaf 3521 comprises a bracket configured to attach to the structure
(e.g., frame
portion). A second hinge leaf 3522 comprises the opening 3504 for the
circuitry and/or
connectors. Any of the hinge leaves can be made from a single piece of
material (e.g., from
a single slab), or can be made of portions attached together to form a single
piece. Attached
can comprise stitched, welded, interlocked, or screwed,
[0223] In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to extend along a side
of the
display construct. The fastener can comprise a single unit that extends to the
at least a
portion of the side length of the display construct. The single unit may be of
a single material
(e.g., a single slab). The single unit may or may not have one or more
openings. The
extension of the unit (e.g., hinge leaf) may be of at least about 30%, 40%,
50%, 60%, 70%,
80%, 90%, 95%, or 95% of the length of the display construct side. In some
embodiments, at
least a portion of the fastener (e.g., at least one hinge leaf) extends to the
full length of a
side of the display construct. In some embodiments, the fastener extends
(e.g., slightly)
beyond the full length of the side of the display construct. In some
embodiments, the
fastener accommodates the side of the display construct. Fig. 35 shows an
example of
fastener 3502 having a portion (e.g., hinge leaf) 3522 that extends to at
least the full length
of display construct 3501, which hinge leaf 3522 has an opening 3504 that
facilitate access
to at least a portion of the circuitry 3530 (e.g., connectors 3509 thereof) as
well as a plurality
of openings that facilitate air flow and/or heat exchange, which hinge leaf is
formed of a
single portion (e.g., single slab).
[0224] In some embodiments, the fastener may be configured to facilitate heat
exchange.
The fastener may be configured to accommodate any of the heat exchange devices
and/or
technologies disclosed herein. For example, the fastener may be configured to
accommodate one or more fans for active gas (e.g., air) conduction. The
fastener may be
configured to accommodate at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 20 fans.
The fastener may
be configured to accommodate a number of fans between any of the
aforementioned
number of fans (e.g., from 1 to 20, from 1 to 10, or from 10 to 20). The
number of fans may
be an even number. The number of fans may be (e.g., evenly) distributed on
both sides of
the opening. The opening to the circuitry may be centered along a length of
the fastener.
The openings for the gas flow (e.g., and placement of the fans) may be
disposed along the
fastener and further away from the opening. Every two fans may be
symmetrically aligned
along the middle portion of the fastener length (e.g., leaf length). Fig. 35
shows an example
of a fastener 3502 having a leaf with an opening 3504 centered along its
length, which leaf
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
has a plurality of openings 3505a and 3505b (eight openings in total) that
facilitate gas
exchange and accommodation of fans (e.g., 3524). The plurality of openings may
be vent
holes. The openings can be arranged symmetrically along the length center of
the fastener
and extend along the fastener leaf away from the opening. The openings in each
of the
opening groups 3505a and 3505b are distributed evenly (e.g., are evenly
spaced) along the
fastener (e.g., hinge leaf) portion and arranged symmetrically as two groups,
with respect to
the center of the fastener length. Fastener leaf 3522 is coupled to a corner
3529 configured
to hold a circuit board 3597. The circuit board can be coupled to the sensor
and emitter
panel disposed in a protective framing cover 3503. The framing cover protects
at least a
portion of a transparent material (e.g., 3598) configured to allow the emitted
radiation (e.g.,
infrared radiation) of the touch screen functionality to travel therethrough.
[0225] In some embodiments, the display construct fastener
comprises a plurality of
circuit boards. The circuit boards may include a booster and/or driver board,
and/or at least
one circuitry facilitating the touch screen functionality. For example, there
could be two
circuit boards facilitating the touch screen functionality. At least one of
the plurality of circuit
boards may be attached to the fastener. Fig. 35 shows an example of a touch
screen
circuitry 3597 coupled to the hinge leaf 3522 by a connective piece (e.g., L
bracket 3529. An
additional circuitry 3599 (e.g., facilitating the touch screen functionality)
(e.g., 3599) may or
may not be coupled to the fastener (e.g., to hinge leaf 3522).
[0226] In some examples, the fastener facilitates cooling and/or
air flow on one side of the
display construct, and touch screen functionality on the opposing side of the
display
construct. Fig. 35 shows an example of touch screen 3501 coupled to fastener
3502 such
that an air flow 3536 is directed to the back side of the display construct
3501 that would be
further away from a viewer, and a touch screen functionality (e.g., including
transparent
material 3598) disposed on the opposing side of the display construct 3501
that is closer to
the viewer (e.g., and accessible to the viewer for touch screen
functionality). The viewer is
displayed schematically as figurine 3596 to designate the viewer side of
display construct
3501(e.g., which scale may be disproportional, e.g., to the display
construct).
[0227] In some embodiments, the fastener may be configured to facilitate heat
exchange.
The fastener may be configured to facilitate active heat conduction from the
external
atmosphere towards the display construct (e.g., gas pushing). The fastener may
be
configured to facilitate active heat conduction from the display construct
towards the external
atmosphere (e.g., gas suction). For example, the fastener may be configured to
accommodate one or more fans configured to direct gas (e.g., air) from the
ambient
atmosphere around the fastener, towards a designated path. The path may be
designated
by a directing structure. The directing structure may at least one planar
and/or a curved
portion. Fig. 35 shows an example of a gas directing structure 3523 having
planar portions
3531 and 3532, and curved portion 3533. The gas directing structure may be
formed of one
96
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
piece of material (e.g., one slab), or a plurality of attached (e.g.,
stitched, soldered,
interlocked, and/or fastened) portions. The gas directing portion may be
configured to direct
the gas along path 3526. Fig. 35 shows various views of a fastener and
associated
components. The gas may be directed from the external environment (e.g.,
atmosphere of
the enclosure) towards the display construct, e.g., through the gas directing
path (e.g.,
formed by the gas directing structure and/or the fastener. The gas directing
structure may be
part of the fastener or coupled thereto. The gas directing structure may be
coupled (e.g.,
fastened to or be a part of) to a first leaf of the fastener. The gas
directing structure may not
be part of (or coupled to) the other (e.g., second) leaf. The gas directing
structure may be
coupled (e.g., fastened to or be a part of) to a first leaf of the fastener
configured to attach to
the display construct. The gas directing structure may not be part of (or not
be coupled to)
the other (e.g., second) leaf configured to attach to the supportive structure
(e.g., fixture
such as a frame portion or a wall). The supportive structure may be part of
the enclosure
(e.g., a fixture of the enclosure). The fans may comprise an actuator. The
fans may be
controlled by the controller (e.g., any controller disclosed herein). The fans
may be controller
locally (e.g., in the controller of the fastener and/or the E-box). The fans
may be controlled
remotely (e.g., by the BMS, and/or by higher hierarchy controller such as a
floor controller or
a master controller). The fans may be controller by a controller configured to
control a sensor
and/or emitter (e.g., a device ensemble).
[0228] Fig. 36 shows perspective view examples of a display construct coupled
to a
portion of the fastener. Fig. 36 shows an example of hinge leaf 3622 having
two knuckle
groups 3685a and 3685b. Each knuckle group has a hinge (e.g., 3620) inserted
therethrough. Each knuckle group is part of a knuckle assembly forming a
hinge. The
knuckle groups 3685a and 3685h form an integral portion of the hinge leaf 3622
that has a
plurality of openings arranged in two symmetric groups 3605a and 3605b about
the center of
the length of hinge leaf 3622. The hinge leaf 3622 has an egressed portion
3604 centered
about the length of the hinge length. The hinge leaf 3622 is formed of a
single piece (e.g.,
single slab, slice, strip, or plate). The hinge leaf 3622 extends along the
full length of the side
of display construct 3601. The display construct 3601 is devoid of a frame
surrounding all its
sides. The openings (e.g., 3605c) are configured to allow gas (e.g., air) to
pass therethrough
from one side of the display construct 3601, e.g., along path 3626. Hinge leaf
3622 also
comprises a protruding feature (e.g., boss) 3699. The ending "a" in numerals
3601a and
3622a designates that a portion of the respective items without the ending "a"
is shown (e.g.,
3601a is a portion of display construct 3601).
[0229] Fig. 37 shows perspective view examples of display construct 3701
framed by
sensor-emitter panel e.g., 3703. The display construct is coupled to a
fastener 3702 having
two hinge leaves 3721 and 3722. The hinge leaf 3721 is configured to couple to
a supporting
structure. The hinge leaf 3721 has two sets of open knuckles 3783a and 3783b
configured
97
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
to attach or detach to hinge leaf 3722, by integrating with the closed cavity
knuckles 3785a
and 3785b respectively, each holding a hinge pintle. The hinge leaf 3721 is
formed in a
shape of a bracket. Hinge leaf 3722 comprises an opening 3704 (e.g., carved
out portion, or
egress) centered along its length, which opening extends to a portion of the
hinge leaf width.
The opening is configured to facilitate access to a portion of any attached
circuitry (e.g.,
booster and/or driver board) and/or connectors that would be attached to hinge
leaf 3722
and/or coupled to (e.g., and communicating with) the display construct and to
the E-box and
power source. Hinge leaf 3722 has a plurality of openings (e.g., 3705)
arranged as two
groups about the length of the leaf hinge 3722. The openings in each group are
evenly
spaced. The openings allow exchange of gas (e.g., air). Hinge leaf 3722 is
coupled to a gas
directing structure (e.g., gas guide) 3723. The gas guide is configured to
direct any incoming
gas (e.g., air) through the openings (e.g., 3705) to one side of the display
construct through
cavity 3750, such that the gas will flow, e.g., in the direction depicted in
broken arrows 3751
(or in a reverse direction). Portion 3732 covers (and forms) the cavity 3750,
which portion
3732, 3733, and 3731 are part of the gas guide portion 3723. The ending "a" in
numerals
3701a, 3702a, 3703a, 3721a, 3722a, 3723a, and 3733a designates that a portion
of the
respective items without the ending "a" is shown (e.g., 3701a is a portion of
display construct
3701).
[0230] In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to
facilitate heat exchange. The
heat exchange may be active. The heat exchange may be facilitated by one or
more fans,
gas (e.g., air) directing component, and/or gas channel. The paths formed in
the fastener for
the gas flow may be designed to accommodate the flow of air without forming
excessive or
reduced pressure in the faster, e.g., as compared to ambient pressure. The
area through
which the gas is allowed to flow in the fastener may be greater that the area
through which
the gas flows in the fans. For example, the total horizontal cross sectional
area of the fan
openings (e.g., 3805) may be smaller than the total horizontal cross sectional
area between
the gas guide (e.g., 3823) and the plate (e.g., 3855) that together form the
gas channel
directing the gas (e.g., 3851) towards the outer portion of the display
construct (e.g., 3801).
[0231] Fig. 38 shows perspective view examples of display construct 3801
coupled to
portions of a fastener 3822 (e.g., hinge leaf) having an opening (e.g.,
regression, carveout,
or egress) 3804 that extends to a portion of its width, which opening is
centered along its
length. The opening 3804 is configured to allow access to a portion of the
circuitry 3830
and/or connectors thereof. Hinge leaf 3822 has two sets of knuckles 3884a and
3884b, and
a plurality of openings (e.g., 3805) that facilitates flow of gas (e.g., air)
therethrough. Hinge
leaf 3822 is coupled to a gas guide 3823 that is configured to guide gas
flowing through
(e.g., incoming or outgoing) the openings (e.g., 3805). The gas guide is
coupled to a plate
3855 having ten protrusions. The protrusions are evenly spaced along the
length of the
plate. The plate is coupled with the gas guide 3823 to form a gas passage
(e.g., between
98
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
every two protrusions). The protrusions are configured to prevent bending
(e.g., collapse) of
the gas guide and/or the plate. The protrusions are configured to ensure that
the gas
passages remain operational and/or intact over time. The gas guide 3823 and
the plate 3855
guide the gas in the direction depicted by the broken arrows (e.g., 3851). Gas
guide 3832
(e.g., that is attached to, or as part of, hinge leaf 3822) is configured to
engage with hinge
leaf 3821 comprising a bracket. The display construct 3801 is framed by sensor-
emitter
panels (e.g., 3803) that facilitate touch screen capability. The bracket
portion of the fastener
can have at least one pointed end (e.g., 3821) or at least one non-pointed end
portion (e.g.,
3525). At least one end of the bracket may be disposed close to the gas guide,
e.g., when
the hinge of the fastener is in a closed position. At least one end of the
bracket may or may
not contact the gas guide. The fastener may be configured to allow a gas
passage (e.g., and
a gap) between the bracket portion of the fastener and the gas guide, e.g.,
when the
fastener is in a closed position. Fig. 35 shows an example of a gap between
the gas guide
3523 and the non-pointed bracket end 3525 of leaf 3921 of the fastener. Fig.
38 shows an
example of a gap between a pointed bracket end 3825 of leaf 3821 of the
fastener and its
complementary portion gas guide 3823 that is part of the bent portion 3533. At
least one end
of the bracket may form a right angle or a non-right angle with a side of the
bracket. At least
one end of the bracket may have an angle and/or curvature that is
complementary to the gas
guide portion immediately adjacent to it, e.g., when the fastener is in a
closed position (e.g.,
shown in the example of 3802). Hinge leaf 3822 is configured to mount a
circuitry 3871 (e.g.,
facilitating the touch screen functionality), which mounting is by using a
mounting structure
that in the shape of an L bracket 3870. The mounting structure can be an
integral part of the
hinge leaf 3822, or may be a separate portion that is snapped, interlocked,
soldered, glued,
bolted, or otherwise attached to hinge leaf 3822. The ending "a" in numerals
3801a, 3803a,
3821a, 3822a, 3832a, 3821a, 3823a, 3840a, and 3855a designates that a portion
of the
respective items without the ending "a" is shown (e.g., 3801a is a portion of
display construct
3801). Item 3890 is a connective piece (e.g., 4090). The gas guide can be
coupled (e.g.,
attached) to the fastener by any attachment (e.g., coupling) method disclosed
herein (e.g.,
snapping, soldering, gluing, bolting, interlocking, or screwing). At the
closed position of the
fastener, the first leaf and the second leaf (and any objects attached
thereto) maintain a
separation (e.g., gap) from each other (e.g., do not contact each other). The
separation (e.g.,
gap) can be of at most about 0.2 millimeters (mm), 0.3mm, 0.4mm, 0.5mm, 0.8mm,
lmm,
3mm, or 5mm. The separation (e.g., gap) can be between any of the
aforementioned values
(e.g., from about 0.2 mm to about 5nnnn, from about 0.2nnnn to about 0.5nnnn,
from about
0.3mm to about 1mm, or from about 0.8mm to about 5mm). The gap may be between
the tip
of the bracket portion (e.g., 3525) of the first hinge leaf and its
complementary portion that is
part of the second hinge leaf (e.g., attached to or an integral part of), such
as the gap guide
(3.g., 3523) complementary portion (e.g., 3533) to the bracket tip portion
(e.g., 3525). The
99
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
ending "a" in numerals 3501a, 3510a, and 3522a, designates that a portion of
the respective
items without the ending "a" is shown (e.g., 3501a is a portion of display
construct 3501).
Item 3505c represent a portion of fans 3505b. The fastener and associated
components are
represented as a side view in 3570.
[0232] In some embodiments, the fastener is masked from the viewer by a cap
(e.g.,
beauty cap). The cap can serve as a protective lid or cover for the fastener.
The cap can
mask the fastener in the supportive structure (e.g., fixture) in which it is
installed. For
example, the cap can mimic a portion of a framing (e.g., window framing), or a
portion of a
wall. The cap can be camouflaged in its surrounding (e.g., in the supportive
structure). The
cap can attach to the supportive structure, e.g., using any of the attachments
disclosed
herein, e.g., bolting, screwing, snapping, or adhering (e.g., using an
adhesive). The
supportive structure may be configured to facilitate such attachment (e.g., by
incorporating a
complementary structure to which the cap would attach to).
[0233] In some embodiments, the gas guide is configured to guide the gas along
a side of
the display construct. The side of the display construct along which the gas
is guided to, may
be closest to the supportive structure (e.g., wall, tintable glass, and/or
framing). The side of
the display construct along which the gas is guided to, may be further away
from a viewer.
The side of the display construct along which the gas is guided to, may be
opposite to a side
of the display construct having the touch screen capability. The side of the
display construct
along which the gas is guided to, may be opposition to the side along which
emitters are
emitting radiation as part of the touch screen functionality. Fig. 38 shows an
example of a
display construct 3801 having gas flow directed on one side of display
construct 3801,
illustrated by broken arrows, e.g., 3841, which side of the display construct
is opposite to the
side viewed and/or accessed by a viewer illustrated schematically by figurine
3899 (e.g.,
which scale may be unproportioned, e.g., to the display construct).
[0234] In some embodiments, the gas guide may be separated from a hinge leaf
by a
protruded feature (e.g., a boss). The protruding feature may protrude from the
gas guide or
from the hinge leaf. The protruding feature may be an integral part of the gas
guide or hinge
leaf. The protruding feature may be a separate piece that is attached to the
gas guide or
hinge leaf (e.g., using any of the attachment methods disclosed herein). Fig.
38 shows an
example of a protruding feature 3840 (e.g., boss) that protrudes from hinge
leaf 3822. The
protruding feature may offer structural support to portion(s) of the fastener.
[0235] In some embodiments, initiation of active heat exchange may be
controlled by a
controller. The controller may utilize a feedback control scheme. The feedback
control
scheme may utilize temperature data. The temperature data may derive from at
least one
temperature sensor. The temperature data may relate to the temperature at one
or more
positions of the display construct. The fastener may be configured to
accommodate and/or
connect to at least one temperature sensor (e.g., thermocouple or IR sensor).
The at least
100
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
one temperature sensor may be configured to sense a temperature of the display
construct.
The at least one temperature sensor may be disposed such that it will contact
a side (e.g.,
rim) of the display construct away from the viewer, closest to the supporting
structure, and/or
closest to a window to which it is coupled. The at least one sensor may be
disposed in a
framing (e.g., sensor and emitter protective framing) and/or any portion
(e.g., component) of
the fastener. The control scheme may direct activation of the active heat
exchange system
(e.g., fans and/or cooler) when the temperature reaches first threshold (e.g.,
as disclosed
herein). The control scheme may direct shutting off operation of the display
construct when
the temperature reaches a second threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein). The
control scheme
may direct de-activation of the active heat exchange system (e.g., fans and/or
cooler) when
the temperature reaches a third threshold (e.g., as disclosed herein). In some
embodiments,
the second threshold is higher than the first threshold (e.g., has a higher
temperature value).
In some embodiments, the third threshold is lower than the first threshold
and/or the second
threshold (e.g., has a lower temperature value). At times, the active heat
exchange is always
in an "on" mode, and is shut down if the temperature exceeds a threshold
(e.g., the second
threshold delineated herein). The (e.g., any of the higher temperature
thresholds such as the
second threshold) threshold may be of a temperature having a value of at least
about 30 C,
35 C, 40 C, 43 C, 45 C, 47 C, 49 C, 50 C, 53 C, 55 C, or 57 C. The threshold
(e.g., any
of the lower temperature thresholds such as the third threshold) may be of a
temperature
having a value of at most about 20 C, 25 C, 30 C, 35 C, 40 C, or 45 C. The
high
temperature threshold may be a temperature at which the light emitting
entities are likely to
be (e.g., permanently) damages (e.g., burn out).
[0236] In some embodiments, the fan(s) are activated at a capacity. The fan
capacity
(e.g., rotational speed) may be constant, e.g., and the control may comprise
turning the fans
on and off. For example, when the fans are activated, they rotate at (e.g.,
substantially)
100% capacity. The fan capacity may vary, e.g., and the control may comprise
turning the
fans on and off and varying its rotational speed (e.g., by varying the power
supplied to the
fans). For example, when the fans are activated, they may operate at a
capacity lower than
100%. For example, the fans may initially rotate at a low capacity of at most
1%, 5%, 7%,
10%, or 15% capacity. The fans may increase their rotational capacity
linearly, non-linearly,
intermittently and/or continuously. For example, the rotational speed of the
fan(s) may ramp
up. Increasing the rotational speed of the fans may depend on the temperature
of the display
construct (e.g., as measured by at least one temperature sensors, e.g., that
is an integral
part of the display construct assembly). The controller may adjust the
rotational speed of the
fans using a feedback control scheme. The controller may utilize sensor
readings for the
feedback control scheme. The sensor readings may derive from temperature
and/or
electromagnetic radiation sensors. The sensor(s) may be operatively coupled to
the network.
The sensors may be disposed in the enclosure (e.g., building) in which the
display construct
101
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
is disposed. The sensors may sense the temperature of the display construct
and/or the
internal environment in the enclosure where the display construct is disposed.
The sensors
may sense radiation (e.g., sun rays) emitted through the display construct
and/or into the
internal environment in the enclosure where the display construct is disposed.
The sensors
may sense temperature and/or radiation affecting temperature of the display
construct
directly and/or indirectly.
[0237] Fig. 39 shows perspective view examples of various portions of display
construct
3901 having touch screen capability, coupled to a fastener 3902. The fastener
has a hinge
having a first hinge leaf 3921 and a second hinge leaf 3922, which leaves are
configured to
swing about an axis. Item 3980 shows a portion of the display construct
bordered by a
portion of the sensor-emitter panel and its housing. The fastener includes a
gas guide 3923,
a plurality of holes that facilitate egress and/or ingress of gas
therethrough, and a first
circuitry 3930. The hinge leaf 3922 has a depression 3904. The depression can
be
configured to facilitate access to a second circuitry and/or connectors (not
shown in fig. 39)
configured to be coupled to the display construct and to the E-box (e.g.,
timing controller
therein) and/or power source. The first circuitry 3930 may be disposed on (or
be otherwise
coupled to) a side of the hinge leaf 3922. The first circuitry may be
configured to facilitate
operation of the touch screen functionality, which includes sensor and emitter
panels
bordering the display construct, e.g., 3903. The sensor and emitter panel
comprises a
circuitry 3923 to which the sensors and emitters (e.g., 3922 are coupled to, a
reflective
surface (e.g., mirror) 3925, a protecting framing including 3924 and 3927, and
transparent
material 3920 configured to allow radiation from the emitters to travel
therethrough (and
optionally protect the circuitry from the ambient environment such as from
humidity). The
framing portion 3924 is configured to support the display construct 3901 above
a portion of
sensor and emitter assembly (e.g., above reflecting surface 3925). The
protecting framing
(and the components therein) extends along a side of the display construct
3901. Every two
perpendicular protecting framings meet at a connection corner 3990 at an edge
of the
display construct 3901. The connecting corner comprises a body 3991 and a
cover 3995 of
the body. The body may be a single piece faceplate. The cover (e.g., corner
cover) is a
tripoded cover 3995. The tripoded cover has three extensions that together
form the tripod.
Two of the three extensions are disposed on a plane, and the third extension
is disposed
normal to the plane. The third extension comprises two wavy structures. The
tripoded cover
3995 is configured to seal the connector of the two normal protecting frames
at their meeting
edge 3990. The body of the connecting corner is configured to house circuit
boards 3998a
and 3998b of the sensor-emitter circuitry. 3901a is a portion of display
construct 3901. The
circuit boards are connected to each other at the corner (not shown). One of
the two circuit
boards is connected to the touch screen circuit board 3930. The body is
configured to house
an internal connector 3094 that has two curved edges, and two pointy edges
forming a cross
102
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
section akin to an eye or an almond. The internal connector 3994 comprises
housing
configured to accommodate a screw. The integral connector may be part of the
single piece
faceplate 3991.
[0238] In some embodiments, the framing of the display construct
is configured to (i)
support the display construct and (ii) separate the display construct from the
sensor and
emitter assembly, and (iii) protect the sensor and emitter assembly from the
ambient
environment. The display construct is configured to be located in a cavity
that is horizontally
and/or vertically within of the sensor and emitter assembly. The display
construct is
separated from a cavity holding the sensor and emitter assembly at least in
part by a framing
(e.g., 3924) and/or by an adhesive. Fig. 39 shows an example of display
construct 3901 held
by framing portion 3924 and an adhesive (e.g., double sided tape) that
contacts the display
construct with the transparent material 3920. The framing comprising 3924 and
3927 forms
an internal cavity for the sensor and emitter assembly (e.g., 3922 and 3925),
and an external
cavity housing the display construct (e.g., 3901). The transparent material
3920 of the
sensor-emitter assembly caps (at least in part, e.g., with the adhesive
material) this internal
cavity from external influences (e.g., humidity and/or debris). 3920a is a
portion of
transparent material 3920. Position X on which the display construct 3901 is
disposed, is
vertically and horizontally within the height of the framing hand the width of
the framing w.
The adhesive material can be a very bonding (VHB) adhesive material (e.g., VHB
double
side tape of 3M).
[0239] In some embodiments, two orthogonal sensor and emitter panels are held
together
by a corner assembly piece. The corner assembly piece may comprise guiding
features
configured to guide two orthogonal circuitry of the sensors and emitters and
align them (e.g.,
vertically) with respect to each other, e.g., within a tolerance. The corner
piece may have
step guides, or wavy guides. Fig. 39 shows an example of a corner assembly
3940
comprising a body 3991 and a corner cover 3995, which corner assembly has two
guides
3996a and 3996b, each guiding a sensor and emitter circuitry. The guide (e.g.,
self-guiding
feature) may be configured to hold the circuit board in place (e.g., within a
tolerance). The
tolerance may allow vertical and/or horizontal displacement of the circuit
board of at most
about 0.5 millimeter (e.g., mm), 0.4mm, 0.3mm, 0.2mm, or 0.1mm.
[0240] In some embodiments, the framing of the display construct
is coupled to the
fastener using at least one connective piece. The connective piece may
comprise a tripod.
The connective piece may have three planes facing three orthogonal directions.
The
connective piece may be configured to connect the fastener with the protective
framing of
the sensor-emitter panel. The connective piece may be configured to engulf
three orthogonal
sides of a portion of (e.g., an edge of) the fastener. Fig. 40 shows
perspective view
examples of various portions of a display construct and associated components.
Fig. 40
shows an example of an entire connective piece 4090 having three orthogonal
sides 4090a,
103
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
4090b, and 4090c (4090d is a partial view of 4090a). the connective piece 4090
is
configured to connect to the gas direction portion 4032 (shown in a partial
view thereot) that
directs gas through a first opening 4005, a second opening 4050 and onto the
rear side of
display construct 4001 (shown as a portion of the display construct), e.g.,
along broken
arrows 4051. The connective piece 4090 is configured to seal a circuitry held
by supporting
portion 4070, and couple to (e.g., connect to) the supporting portion. and to
a side of the
protective framing of the sensor-emitter assembly 4003 (partial view shown) at
its 4090a
side. The fastener comprises at least one hinge having knuckles and pintle
(e.g., 4082), a
first hinge leaf 4021 (partial view shown) comprising a bracket that is
configured to mount on
a supportive structure (e.g., fixture), and a second hinge leaf 4022 (partial
view shown). The
second hinge leaf having at least one gas opening such as 4005, comprises an
elevated
structure 4040 that reduces escape of gas between the leaf of the hinge, when
the hinge is
at its closed position. The fastener 4002 is configured to house at least one
circuit board,
e.g., 4030 (shown as the entire circuit board). Circuit board 4030 (e.g.,
comprising the driver
and/or booster board) is configured to connect to the display construct 4001
and provide
data and/or power via cabling 4031. Circuit board 4030 is also configured to
connect the E-
box (e.g., comprising the timing controller) and/or to the power supply via
(e.g., six) other
cables not sown in Fig. 40. The other cables may extend from the face of board
4030 that is
opposite to the one shown in fig 40.
[0241] In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to direct a
flow of gas. The flow
of gas can be directed along designated openings in the fastener and/or formed
by the
fastener. The fastener, e.g., at its operational and/or closed position, may
reduce the
probability of gas flow in directions other than the designated openings. The
operational
position of the fastener can be a position that facilitates operation of the
display construct for
its intended purpose (e.g., projecting media). The fastener may comprise a
hinge having two
leaves (e.g., joined by knuckles and pintle arrangement). At least one of the
leaves may
comprise an elevated rim to reduce gas from in that direction, e.g., when the
fastener is
closed and/or operational. At least one of the leaves may comprise a gasket to
reduce gas
from in that direction, e.g., when the fastener is closed and/or operational.
Fig. 41 shows
perspective and top view examples of display construct 4101 coupled to a
portion of a
fastener 4122 having a plurality of holes 4105b and 4105a configured to
facilitate gas
flowing therethrough. The hinge leaf 4122 comprises knuckles 4182. The hinge
leaf
comprises an elevated portions 4160 that reduces flow of gas through the
elevated portion,
which flow of gas is between the interior of the fastener (e.g., when closed
and/or
operational) and the ambient environment. The elevated portion may comprise a
gasket; or
be devoid of a gasket. The hinge leaf 4122 comprises a depression 4104 that
extends to a
portion of its width and is centered at its length. 4104a is a portion of
4104. Items 4122a and
4122b are portions of 4122. A gasket may be placed along the 4122 rim of the
opening
104
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
4104, as depicted in broken line 4162. Hinge leaf 4122 comprises a protruding
feature (e.g.,
boss) 4162. The protruding feature may offer structural support to
component(s) of the
hinge. The protruding feature may be an integral part of the fastener (e.g.,
of the hinge leaf).
The protruding feature may be a separate piece that is attached to the
fastener (e.g., of the
hinge leaf), e.g., using any of the attachment methods disclosed herein. The
protruding
feature may be configured to prevent bending (e.g., collapse) of the fastener
portion(s) (e.g.,
hinge leaf). The gasket may be formed of a polymer and/or resin. The polymer
and/or resin
may comprise a carbon or a silicon based material. For example, the polymer
may be a
polyurethane polymer. The gasket may comprise a foamy material. The gasket may
comprise gas pockets, or may be devoid of (e.g., detectable) gas pockets. The
gasket may
comprise a flexible material (e.g., rubber or latex). The gasket may comprise
a material that
is opaque or transparent to visible light.
[0242] In some embodiments, the circuitry contacts and/or attached
to the gas guide. For
example, the circuitry can be disposed and/or attach to the gas guide, e.g.,
above the gas
guide. Above may be in a direction opposite to a gravitational center (e.g.,
opposite to the
direction of the gravitational vector 4200 that points to the gravitational
center). The circuitry
may be configured to facilitate gas flow through the gas channels. Fig. 42
shows various
portions of the display construct and associated fastener assembly as
perspective views.
Fig. 42 shows an example of a circuit board 4230 (e.g., comprising the driver
and/or booster
board) that is configured to connect to the display construct (shown as
portion 4201) and
provide data and/or power via cabling 4231. Circuit board 4230 (partial view
shown) is also
configured to connect the E-box (e.g., comprising the timing controller)
and/or to the power
supply via (e.g., six) other cables not sown in Fig. 42. The other cables may
extend from the
face of board 4230 that is opposite to the one shown in fig 42. Fig. 42 shows
an example of
integration of the circuit board 4230 into the fastener that comprises a first
portion 4222
(partially shown) and a second portion 4221 (partial view shown) held by
hinges 4285. Hinge
leaf 4222 is coupled to a gas guide 4223 that is configured to guide gas
flowing through
(e.g., incoming or outgoing) the openings (not shown in Fig. 42). The gas
guide is coupled to
a plate 4255 (partial view shown) having ten protrusions. The protrusions can
be evenly
spaced along the length of the plate. The plate is coupled with the gas guide
4223 to form a
gas passage (e.g., between every two protrusions). The protrusions are
configured to
prevent bending (e.g., collapse) of the gas guide and/or the plate. The
protrusions are
configured to ensure that the gas passages remain operational and/or intact
overtime. The
gas guide 4223 and the plate 4255 guide the gas in the direction depicted by
the broken
arrows (e.g., 4251). The hinge leaf 4222 is configured to engage with hinge
leaf 4221
comprising a bracket. The display construct 4201 (partial view shown) is
framed by sensor-
emitter panels (e.g., 4203, partial view shown) that facilitate touch screen
capability. 4299
shows a portion view of the fastener, display construct, and associated
components. At least
105
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
one gas passages may be aligned with a fan. The gas passage may be configured
to
facilitate a flow of gas that is at least as the flow of gas generated by the
fan e.g., that is
aligned to the gas passage). The gas passage may be configured to prevent a
pressure in
the fasteners that differs from ambient pressure, e.g., during operation of
the fan(s). The
ambient pressure may be of about 1 atmosphere. A pressure differing from
ambient
pressure comprises over or under pressure.
[0243]
In some embodiments, the two portions of the fastener (e.g., first and
second hinge
leaves) are configured to reversibly engage and disengage from each other. For
example,
one hinge leaf may comprise knuckles having a closed cavity that hold a
pintle, and the
other leaf may comprise complementary knuckles having open cavity and are
devoid of a
pintle. The two complementary sets of knuckles may engage. The engagement may
comprise a snap (e.g., slip in and snap via a snap fit). The engagement may
press a spring.
The engagement may be detected by a compression of a spring and/or by a sensor
(e.g.,
pressure sensor). Once the complementary sets of knuckles are engaged, they
may be
affixed to prevent disengagement. The Affixing may be by utilizing a screw
and/or a pin.
Affixing may be automatically initiated on engagement of the two sets of
complementary
knuckles (e.g., using the sensor and/or spring). The Affixing may be manual.
Affixing the two
hinge leaves (e.g., by affixing the knuckles) may be reversible (e.g.,
automatic and/or
manual). The knuckles may comprise an indentation on their surface (e.g., a
notch or an
incision). The screw and/or pin may engage with the indentation, e.g., upon
affixing (e.g.,
securing) the knuckles and pintle mechanism. Affixing the knuckles and pintle
may prevent
the hinge to open. At least one of the hinges may comprise the fixating (e.g.,
affixing)
mechanism. Fixating may be (e.g., automatically and/or manually) reversible
(e.g., become
unfixed). The unfixed hinge can open and close. The fixed hinge may remain in
one position
(e.g., closed position). Automatic fixation of the hinge may be controller by
a controller (e.g.,
of the control system, or by a separate controller operatively coupled to the
hinge).
[0244] Fig. 43 shows an example of a hinge leaf 4321 having two sets of open
cavity
knuckles 4385a and 4385b. Pintle 4320a is shown as engaged with knuckle set
4385a,
which pintle simulates the complementary set of closed cavity knuckles and
pintle assembly
(e.g., 4082) of the complementary hinge leaf (e.g., 4022 shows a portion of a
hinge leaf).
Screw 4389 is engaged with knuckles 4385a. Fig. 43 shows a protrusion 4388
representing
a snap spring. Screw 4389 can be engaged or disengaged with the knuckle in the
direction
4387. Pintle 4320b (partial view shown) can engage or disengage from knuckle
4385c
(partial view shown) by moving in direction 4386. 4300 shows a portion view of
hinge leaf
4321, knuckle set 4851a, and screw 4389. Fastener portion 4321 is shown as
perspective
view in 4370.
[0245] In some embodiments, a user controls a set of displays via a touch
screen as if the
set of displays was a single display (e.g., screen division of an image). The
screen division
106
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
of the displayed image among the display set may be effectuated via software
(e.g., non-
transitory computer readable medium). The software may read inputs (e.g., via
the network
and/or USB) from each touch display and, knowing where each display is located
in the set
(also called group), may compute the location of the user touch in the set.
For example,
assuming the set has a Cartesian coordinate system where 0, 0 is located at a
lower left
corner (as viewed by a viewer of the displays) and 100%, 100% is located at
the upper right
corner (as viewed from a viewer of the displays), for a 2x2 display group the
lower left corner
of a display set is 0, 0 and the upper right corner of the display set is
100%, 100%. For this
example of a 2x2 display set, the transformation of the touch on any display
is represented
by: X = (0.5 * (X of one of the left side displays) or (0.5 + (0.5* (X of one
of the right side
displays))); and Y = (0.5* (Y of one of the lower displays) or (0.5 + (0.5 *
(Y of one of the
upper displays))); where X is in a horizontal direction relative to a display
viewer and Y is in a
vertical direction relative to a display viewer. Adjustments may be made to
the
transformation of the coordinate system to account for screen gap between the
touch
displays. Each of the four displays may include its own two sets of sensor and
emitter panel
(e.g., around the edge of each display) to detect user touch for touch screen
functionality.
Each of the displays may have only two of the four sensor and emitter panels
attached,
which panels may be attached around the outer edges of the display set.
[0246] Fig. 30A shows an example of four displays 3002a, 3002b, 3002c and
3002d that
form a display set 3003. Each of the displays 3002a-d displays the same image.
Fig. 30A
shows an example of four displays 3022a, 3022b, 3022c and 3022d that form a
display set
3023. Each of the displays 3022a-d displays together the image displayed in,
e.g., 3002c. If
a user will want to click on the surfer displayed in the display set 3003, the
user will be able
to do so by clicking on any position 3008a-d of display set 3003. If a user
will want to click on
the surfer displayed in the display set 3023, the user will be able to do so
by clicking on
position 3029 of display set 3023, but not on, e.g., position 3028 (that is
analogous to
position 3008c). The screen division of the image among the display set 3023
may be
effectuated via software. The software may read inputs (e.g., from the touch
screen or
curser) and, knowing how the image is parceled among the displays, compute a
location that
the user points to. For example, assuming the set has a Cartesian coordinate
system where
0, 0 is located at a lower left corner (as viewed by a viewer of the displays)
and 100%, 100%
is located at the upper right corner (as viewed from a viewer of the
displays), for a 2x2
display group the lower left corner of display 3002c is 0, 0 and the upper
right corner of
display 3002b is 100%, 100%. For this example of a 2x2 display set, the
transformation of
the touch on any display is represented by: X = (0.5 * (X of display 3002a or
3002c) or (0.5 +
(0.5 * (X of display 3002b or 3002d))); and Y = (0.5 * (Y of display 3002c or
3002d) or (0.5 +
(0.5 * (Y of display 3002a or 3002b))); where X is in a horizontal direction
relative to a
display viewer and Y is in a vertical direction relative to a display viewer.
Adjustments may
107
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
be made to the transformation of the coordinate system to account for screen
gap 3005
between the touch displays. Fig. 30A shows an example of gaps 3005 and 3025
between
two immediately adjacent displays, which gaps may be filled with a polymer
and/or resin.
[0247] Fig. 30B shows an example of four displays 3010a, 3010b, 3010c and
3010d
(shown by the left four displays shown in Fig. 30B) in a display set 3011,
wherein the image
is displayed across the four displays 3010a-3010d as if they were as singled
display (shown
by the right four displays shown in Fig. 30B). Each of the displays can have
its own
identification (e.g., shown as numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4).
[0248] Fig. 31A shows an example of four display constructs 3101a, 3101b,
3101c and
3101d in a 2x2 display construct set 3103. Each of the four displays 3101a-
3101d includes
its own two sets of sensor and emitter panel 3104 (shown around the edge of
each display)
to detect user contact for touch screen functionality.
[0249] Fig. 31B sows an example of four display constructs 3105a, 3105b, 3105c
and
3105d in a 2x2 display construct set 3106 that engulf the display construct
set. The set of
display constructs 3106 collectively has two perpendicular sensor and emitter
panels
attached in frame 3108, which panels are attached around the outer edges of
the display set
3106. Thus, each of the display constructs 3105a-d has two sides on which a
sensor emitter
panel portion is disposed (e.g., the external matrix sides), and two sides
devoid of a sensor
and emitter panel (e.g., the internal matrix sides).
[0250] In some embodiments, media displays forming a matrix of displays may be
mounted adjacent to a supportive panel. The supportive panel may be a window.
The
window may be any window disclosed herein. For example, the supportive panel
may be a
tintable window. The supportive panel may include framing. The framing may
surround a
portion or all of the supportive panel. The framing may include one or more
transoms and/or
one or more mullions. The media displays may be immediately adjacent to each
other When
a first media display is disposed immediately adjacent to a second media
display, there are
no other (intervening) media displays disposed between the first media display
and the
second media display. The matrix of displays adjacent to a supportive panel
may be a 1x2,
1x3, 1x4 or any 1xn matrix (with "n" being an integer). The matrix of displays
adjacent to a
supportive panel may be a 2x2, 2x3, 2x4, or any 2xn matrix (with "n" being an
integer). The
matrix of displays adjacent to a supportive panel may be a mxn matrix, with m
and n being
integers that may or may not be equal to each other. When m is greater than 2,
then the
display matrix may be divided into portions of 2Xn and 1Xn matrices, e.g., in
terms of the
retaining clip configurations. The media displays may be displaceable (e.g.,
movable)
relative to the supportive panel. For example, the media displays may swivel
(e.g., pivot)
relative to the support panel. The media displays may swivel about hinge
joint(s). A hinge
joint may be defined by a respective hinge pivotally securing a media display
to a support
panel. Each of the hinges may be secured between framing of the supportive
panel and a
108
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
framing of respective media display. The hinges may be disposed at a top,
bottom and/or
sides of the media displays. Top and bottom may be relative to a gravitational
center. Hinges
for greater than 1x2 (e.g., 1xn, with n>2) display matrices and 2x4 (e.g.,
2xn, with n>4)
display matrices may be located along edges of the media displays in the
smaller matrix
dimension. The media displays may be swivelable into a position where the
media displays
are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane.
[0251] In some embodiments, a semi-permeable material is disposed between
framing of
the supportive panel and one or more adjacent media panels. The semi-permeable
material
may be secured to the framing of the supportive panel (e.g., an adhesive
between the semi-
permeable material and the framing). The semi-permeable material may be
configured to
reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the framing of the supportive
panel and one
or more of the media displays (e.g., along edges of one or more of the media
displays), e.g.,
to eliminate any cracks through which light can penetrate through between the
framing and
the display. The semi-permeable material may allow for circulation of air
through the semi-
permeable material (e.g., to facilitate cooling of the display construct). The
semi-permeable
material may be a foam (e.g., polyurethane) configured to insulate light
(e.g., reduce or block
light penetration between the framing of the supportive panel and one or more
media
displays), facilitate air flow (e.g., for cooling the one or more media
displays) along the
displays, and/or provide a cushion to reduce (e.g., eliminate) damage during
installation
and/or operation of the media displays (e.g., reduce damage due to banging one
or more of
the media displays with the framing). The material of the semi-permeable
material may
comprise a polymer (e.g., an organic polymer, or a silicon based polymer). The
semi-
permeable material may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage
(e.g., 10%,
15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 50%), which may set a planar alignment of the media
displays
in the matrix of displays.
[0252] In some embodiment, mounting the display construct (e.g.,
media display) to the
framing comprises engaging a retaining clip. A retaining clip may be removably
mountable to
the media displays. The retaining clip may facilitate maintaining alignment of
the media
displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The semi-permeable
material may be
compressed during installation of the retaining clip. The retaining clip, in
conjunction with the
semi-permeable material, may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media
displays in the
same, or substantially the same, plane (e.g., viewable plane of the media
display). The semi-
permeable material, which may be compressed during installation of the
retaining clip, may
generate a reaction force on the media displays opposite from a force applied
to the media
displays due to the retaining clip, with such reaction force facilitating
maintaining alignment
of the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The
retaining clip may
retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays
during engagement of
the retaining clip with the media displays. The retaining clip may be disposed
adjacent to
109
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
ends of the media displays opposite from ends of the media displays that are
coupled to
hinges. The retaining clip may be disposed adjacent to an end of a first media
display that is
disposed immediately adjacent to an end of a second media display. For a
display matrix
greater than 1x2 (e.g., 1xn, n>2) or 2x4 (e.g., 2xn, n>4), more than one
retaining clip may be
employed to secure media displays relative to the supportive panel, and
maintain a planar
(or substantially planar) plane of the displays in the matrix (e.g., which
plane may be the
viewable plane of the media displays forming the display matrix).
[0253] Fig. 44 shows an example of an assembly 4400 having four media displays
4405a-
4405d forming a matrix of displays. While shown as a 2x4 display matrix, such
a matrix may
be 2xn ("n" being an integer), with retaining clips, discussed below, between
immediately
adjacent media displays. The media displays 4405a-4405d are adjacent to a
supportive
panel (e.g., window; e.g., any window disclosed herein) 4410 that includes
framing. The
framing may include mullions 4415a and 4415b and transoms 4420a and 4420b. The
media
displays 4405a-4405b may be disposed within the framing. Media displays 4405a
and 4405b
may be disposed on substantially the same vertical plane immediately adjacent
to each
other, and media displays 4405c and 4405d may be disposed on (e.g.,
substantially) the
same vertical plane immediately adjacent to each other. Media displays 4405a
and 4405c
may be disposed on (e.g., substantially) the same horizontal plane immediately
adjacent to
each other, and media displays 4405b and 4405d may be disposed on (e.g.,
substantially)
the same horizontal plane immediately adjacent to each other. Horizontal and
vertical may
be relative to a gravitational center (e.g., in the direction of gravitational
vector 4490 directed
to gravitational center G). Media display 4405a may be pivotally coupled to
the supportive
panel 4410 via a hinge 4425a, media display 4405b may be pivotally coupled to
the
supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425b, media display 4405c may be pivotally
coupled to
the supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425c, and media display 4405d may be
pivotally
coupled to the supportive panel 4410 via a hinge 4425d. Each media display
4405a-4405d
may be pivotable about joints formed by the hinges 4425a-4425d, respectively,
to positions
where the media displays 4405a-4405d extend away from the supportive panel
4410 and
positions where the media displays 4405a-4405d extend generally parallel to
the supportive
panel 4410 such that the media displays 4405a-4405d are aligned in the same,
or
substantially the same, plane (e.g., media viewing plane). A retaining clip
4430 may be
removably mounted to the media displays 4405a-4405d such that the retaining
clip 4430
facilitates maintaining alignment of the media displays 4405a-4405d in the
same, or
substantially the same, planes, and/or retaining, or substantially retaining,
relative positions
of the media displays 4405a-4405d during engagement of the retaining clip 4430
with the
media displays 4405a-4405d. The retaining clip 4430 may be disposed adjacent
to ends of
the media displays 4405a-4405d opposite from ends of the media displays 4405a-
4405d
110
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
that are coupled to the hinges 4425a-4425d. Removably mounted comprises
removal and
mounting reversibly.
[0254] Fig. 44 shows an example of an assembly 4450 having two media displays
4455a-
445b forming a matrix of displays. The media displays 4455a-4455b are disposed
adjacent
to a supportive panel (e.g., window; e.g., any window disclosed herein) 4460
that includes
framing. The framing may include mullions 4465a and 4465b and transoms 4470a
and
4470b. The media displays 4455a-4455d may be disposed within the framing.
Media
displays 4455a and 4455b may be disposed on (e.g., substantially) the same
vertical plane
immediately adjacent to each other. Media display 4455a may be pivotally
coupled to the
supportive panel 4460 via a hinge 4475a, and media display 4455b may be
pivotally coupled
to the supportive panel 4460 via a hinge 4475b. Each media display 4455a-4455b
may be
pivotable about joints formed by the hinges 4475a-4475b, respectively, to
positions where
the media displays 4455a-4455b extend away from the supportive panel 4460 and
positions
where the media displays 4455a-4455b extend generally parallel to the
supportive panel
4460 such that the media displays 4455a-4455b are aligned in the same, or
substantially the
same, plane (e.g., media viewing plane). A retaining clip 4480 may be
removably mounted to
the media displays 4455a-4455b such that the retaining clip 4480 facilitates
maintaining
alignment of the media displays 4455a-4455b in the same, or substantially the
same, planes,
and/or retaining, or substantially retaining, relative positions of the media
displays 4455a-
4455b during engagement of the retaining clip 4480 with the media displays
4455a-4455b.
The retaining clip 4480 may be disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays
4455a-
4455b opposite from ends of the media displays 4455a-4455b that are coupled to
the hinges
4475a-4475b.
[0255] In some embodiments, interior framing portions are
configured to be secured to a
supportive panel (e.g., 4410, 4460) and be removably coupled to a retaining
clip (e.g., 4430,
4380). Interior framing portions may comprise one or more framing members.
Interior
framing portions may be configured to extend across a supportive panel and/or
along an
edge of a supportive panel. Interior framing portions may include a first arm
extending
between or along framing of the supportive panel. A first arm may be mounted
to a
supportive panel (e.g., with fasteners and/or by welding). Interior framing
portions may
include a second arm, which may be generally normal to a first arm. The second
arm may
extend between or along framing of the supportive panel. A second arm may be
mounted to
a supportive panel (e.g., with fasteners and/or welding). The first arm may
have upstanding
flanges. The upstanding flanges may provide stiffness against out of plane
bending. The first
arm may have upstanding flanges such that the first arm has a generally C-
shaped cross
section. The first arm may have upstanding flanges such that the first arm has
a generally L-
shaped cross section. The second arm may have upstanding flanges. The
upstanding
flanges may provide stiffness against out of plane bending. The second arm may
have
111
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
upstanding flanges such that the second arm has a generally C-shaped cross
section. The
second arm may have upstanding flanges such that the second arm has a
generally L-
shaped cross section. The first arm may be secured directly to the second arm.
The first arm
secured to the second arm may form a joint. The first arm may be directly
secured to the
second arm such that tolerances in separate parts are accommodated. One or
both of the
first and second arms may include slotted fastener holes, allowing for
accommodation of
tolerances. One or both of the first and second arms may include cutouts,
allowing for
accommodation of tolerances. The first arm may be secured to the second arm
via a joint
bracket. A joint bracket may be X-shaped, +-shaped, and/or cross-shaped. The
first arm
secured to the second arm may form a joint. The first arm may be secured to
the second
arm via a joint bracket such that tolerances in separate parts are
accommodated. One or
both of the first and second arms may include slotted fastener holes, allowing
for
accommodation of tolerances. One or both of the first and second arms may
include cutouts,
allowing for accommodation of tolerances. The tolerances accommodated may
account for
fabrication and/or assembly tolerances in framing (e.g., transoms and/or
mullions), interior
framing portions and/or brackets. The interior framing portions may include a
member for
releasably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portions. The
member for
releasably securing the retaining clip to the interior framing portions may be
a boss. The
boss may have a threaded hole. The retaining clip may have a passage alignable
with the
threaded hole. A fastener may be configured to telescopically slide through
the passage and
be threadably received in the threaded hole of the boss. The interior framing
portions may
include one or more stiffener flanges. The one or more stiffener flanges may
be located
adjacent to where a retaining clip is secured to the interior framing
portions. The one or more
stiffener flanges may be secured to the boss. The one or more stiffener
flanges may provide
stiffness against out of plane bending.
[0256] A semi-permeable material may be disposed between interior framing
portions and
one or more adjacent media panels. The semi-permeable material may be secured
to the
interior framing portions (e.g., an adhesive between the semi-permeable
material and the
interior framing portions). The semi-permeable material may be mounted along a
plate,
between upstanding flanges, of a generally C-shaped arm. The semi permeable
material
may be compressible. The semi permeable material may comprise a memory foam.
The
semi permeable material may comprise one or more holes and/or channels (e.g.,
configured
to allow gas to flow there thorough). The semi-permeable material, in an
uncompressed
state, may have a thickness greater than a height of the upstanding flanges
(e.g., media
panels may contact the semi-permeable material with reduced or no contact with
a generally
C-shaped, or U shaped arm (e.g., 5362). The generally C-shaped arm may
comprise at least
two (e.g., linear) parallel sections, and one (e.g., linear) perpendicular
section to the two
parallel sections. A first linear section may be adjoined by a second linear
section
112
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
perpendicular to the first linear section, by a curved section of the arm. The
arm may
comprise a curved section (e.g., adjoining two immediately adjacent linear
sections). The
arm may comprise a non-curved section (e.g., linear section). The semi-
permeable material
may be mounted along a plate, adjacent to a flange, of a generally L-shaped
arm (e.g., J-
shaped) arm such as 5023. The generally L-shaped arm may comprise a first
(e.g., linear)
section perpendicular to a second (e.g., linear) section. The first and second
sections may
be adjoined by a curved section. The semi-permeable material, in an
uncompressed state,
may have a thickness sufficient to have reduced or no contact with the L-
shaped arm. The
semi-permeable material may be configured to reduce (e.g., block) light
transmission
between the interior framing portions and one or more of the media displays
(e.g., along
edges of one or more of the media displays). The semi-permeable material may
allow for
circulation of air through the semi-permeable material (e.g., for cooling of
the display matrix).
The semi-permeable material may comprise a foam (e.g., polyurethane)
configured to
insulate light (e.g., reduce or block light penetration between the interior
framing portions
and one or more media displays), facilitate air flow (e.g., for cooling the
one or more media
displays) along the displays, and/or provide a cushion to reduce (e.g.,
eliminate) damage
during installation and/or operation of the media displays (e.g., reduce
damage due to
banging one or more of the media displays with the interior framing portions).
The semi-
permeable material may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage
(e.g., 10%,
15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 50%), which may set, or facilitate, a planar
alignment of the
media displays in the matrix of displays.
[0257] In some embodiments, the interior framing portions may be
configured to couple to
a retaining clip disposed adjacent to ends of the media displays. The ends of
the media
displays that may be coupled to the retaining clip, may each be opposite from
a side of a
respective one of the media displays that is coupled to a supportive panel.
The retaining clip
may be configured to be coupled to pins, with each pin secured to a respective
end of one of
the media displays. The pins engageable by the retaining clip that are on
immediately
adjacent media displays (with no media displays disposed therebetween) may be
adjacent to
each other. A pin may have a shank portion secured to and/or within a
respective media
display and a head portion configured to extend from the respective media
display and be
engageable with a retaining clip.
[0258] In some embodiments, the retaining clip may have a shape configured for
releasably securing to interior framing portions. The retaining clip may have
a shape
configured for releasably securing to media displays. The retaining clip may
be generally T-
shaped. The generally T-shaped retaining may comprise two (e.g., linear)
sections (e.g.,
4560) intercepted by one (e.g., linear) perpendicular section (e.g., 4555) to
the two sections.
The two sections may have the same shape and/or size. The two sections may be
disposed
on the same line. A generally T-shaped retaining clip may include a main leg
configured to
113
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
be secured to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing, and extend
outward from the
supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and a T-leg extending generally
normal to the
main leg and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays. The
main leg
may include a passage therethrough configured to receive a fastener (e.g.,
screw, or nail)
that releasably secures the retaining clip to the supportive panel and/or the
interior framing.
The fastener may be configured to extend through the passage in the main leg
and be
threadably secured in a boss of the interior framing portions. The T-leg may
couple to ends
of adjacent media displays to retain, or substantially retain, relative
positions of the media
displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same,
or substantially
the same, plane. The T-leg may be configured to couple to adjacent pins, each
secured to a
respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-leg may include
pin retention
flanges that partially encircle the pins to retain the pins against the
retaining clip. Semi-
permeable material coupled to the interior framing portions may be compressed
during
installation of the T-shaped retaining clip. The retaining clip, in
conjunction with the semi-
permeable material, may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays
in the same,
or substantially the same, plane. The semi-permeable material, which may be
compressed
during installation of the retaining clip, may generate a reaction force on
the media displays
opposite from a force applied to the media displays due to the retaining clip,
with such
reaction force facilitating maintaining alignment of the media displays in the
same, or
substantially the same, plane. The retaining clip may be generally L-shaped. A
generally L-
shaped retaining clip may include a main leg configured to be secured to the
supportive
panel and/or the interior framing, and extend outward from the supportive
panel and/or the
interior framing; and an L-leg extending generally normal to the main leg and
configured to
be secured to ends of adjacent media displays. The main leg of an L-shaped
retaining clip
may include a passage therethrough configured to receive a fastener that
releasably secures
the retaining clip to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing. The
fastener may be
configured to extend through the passage in the main leg and be threadably
secured in a
boss of the interior framing portions. The L-leg may couple to ends of
adjacent media
displays to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media
displays and/or
facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or substantially
the same, plane.
The L-leg may be configured to couple to adjacent pins, each secured to a
respective one of
up to two adjacent media displays. The L-leg may include a pin retention
flange that partially
encircles the pins to retain the pins against the retaining clip. Semi-
permeable material
coupled to the interior framing portions may be compressed during installation
of the L-
shaped retaining clip. The retaining clip, in conjunction with the semi-
permeable material,
may facilitate maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or
substantially the
same, plane. The semi-permeable material, which may be compressed during
installation of
the retaining clip, may generate a reaction force on the media displays
opposite from a force
114
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
applied to the media displays due to the retaining clip, with such reaction
force facilitating
maintaining alignment of the media displays in the same, or substantially the
same, plane.
[0259] Fig. 45 shows an example of some of the interior framing portions 4500
that are
configured to couple with a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4410) and a
retaining clip (e.g.,
Fig. 44, 4430), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4440 in
Fig. 44. The
interior framing portions 4510 may comprise a first arm 4510 that is secured
to a joint
bracket 4515. The first arm 4510 may comprise a plate 4520 with upstanding
flanges 4525a-
4525b extending along either side. The plate 4520 may block light from shining
through in
gaps between adjacent media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, between 4405a and 4405c,
and
between 4405b and 4405d). The upstanding flanges 4525a and 4525b may increase
the
out-of-plane stiffness (out-of-plane relative to the supportive panel) of the
first arm 4510. The
upstanding flanges 4525a and 4525b may have a height out-of-plane that is
sized to
facilitate alignment of the media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4405a-4405d) in the
same, or
substantially the same, plane. The joint bracket 4515 may comprise fastener
holes 4530 for
securing to a second arm (e.g., Fig. 46, 4612) to the joint bracket 4515. The
joint bracket
4515 comprises a stiffening flange 4535 extending parallel to the upstanding
flanges 4525a
and 4525b, with the stiffening flange 4535 extending along a portion of the
plate 4520 and
over the joint bracket 4515 to a boss 4540 of the joint bracket 4515,
enhancing out-of-plane
stiffness of the interior framing portions 4500. The boss 4540 has a threaded
bore 4545,
which is configured to receive a fastener extending from a retaining clip
4550.
[0260] Fig. 45 shows an example of a retaining clip 4550, which may be
configured to
retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of up to four media
displays (e.g., Fig. 44,
4405a-4405d). The retaining clip 4550 is generally T-shaped. The generally T-
shaped
retaining clip 4550 may include a main leg 4555 that is secured to the
supportive panel (e.g.,
Fig. 44, 4410) and/or the interior framing portion 4500, and extends outward
from the
supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and a T-leg 4560 extending
generally normal to
the main leg 4555 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media
displays (e.g.,
Fig. 44, 4405a-4405d). The main leg 4555 may include a passage 4565
therethrough
configured to receive a fastener (e.g., Fig. 46, 4626) that releasably secures
the retaining
clip 4550 to the supportive panel and/or the interior framing. The fastener is
configured to
extend through the passage 4565 in the main leg 4555 and be threadably secured
in a boss
4540 of the interior framing portions 4500. The T-leg 4560 couples to ends of
adjacent
media displays to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the
media displays
and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or
substantially the same,
plane. The T-leg 4560 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins (e.g., Fig.
47, 4700),
each secured to a respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-
leg 4560
includes pin retention flanges 4570 that partially encircle the pins to retain
the pins against
the retaining clip 4550.
115
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0261] Fig. 46 shows an example of an assembly 4600 comprising the interior
framing
portions 4602 and a retaining clip 4604 that are configured to couple with a
supportive panel
(e.g., Fig. 44, 4410), which may correspond with a portion of encircled area
4440 in Fig. 44.
The interior framing portions 4602 may comprise a first arm 4605 that is
secured to a joint
bracket 4606. The first arm 4605 may comprise a plate 4608 with upstanding
flanges 4610a-
4610b extending along either side. The plate 4608 may block light from shining
through in
gaps between adjacent media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, between 4405a and 4405c,
and
between 4405b and 4405d). The upstanding flanges 4610a and 4610b may increase
the
out-of-plane stiffness (out-of-plane relative to the supportive panel) of the
first arm 4605. The
upstanding flanges 4610a and 4610b may have a height out-of-plane that is
sized to
facilitate alignment of the media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4405a-4405d) in the
same, or
substantially the same, plane. The joint bracket 4606 may comprise fastener
holes (e.g., Fig.
45, 4530) for securing to a second arm 4612 with fasteners 4614 via slotted
holes 4616. The
slotted holes 4616 may allow for tolerances between the various parts of the
assembly 4600
and support panel. The second arm 4612 may comprise a plate 4618 with
upstanding
flanges 4620a-4620b extending along either side. The plate 4618 may block
light from
shining through in gaps between adjacent media displays (e.g., Fig. 44,
between 4405a and
4405b, and between 4405c and 4405d). The plate 4618 may have cutouts 4621
adjacent to
an end in order to allow for tolerances between the various parts of the
assembly 4600 and
support panel. The upstanding flanges 4620a and 4620b may increase the out-of-
plane
stiffness (out-of-plane relative to the supportive panel) of the second arm
4612. The
upstanding flanges 4620a and 4620b may have a height out-of-plane that is
sized to
facilitate alignment of the media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4405a-4405d) in the
same, or
substantially the same, plane. The joint bracket 4606 comprises a stiffening
flange 4622
extending parallel to the upstanding flanges 4610a and 4610b, with the
stiffening flange
4622 extending along a portion of the plate 4608 and over the joint bracket
4606 to a boss
4624 of the joint bracket 4606, enhancing out-of-plane stiffness of the
interior framing
portions 4602. The boss 4624 has a threaded bore (e.g., Fig. 45, 4545), which
is configured
to receive a fastener 4626 extending through the retaining clip 4604. The
retaining clip 4604
may be shaped as described in the example of Fig. 45.
[0262] Fig. 47 shows an example of a pin 4700. The pin 4700 may include a
shank
portion 4702 that is configured to secure to a media display (e.g., Fig. 44,
4405a-4405d) and
a head portion 4704 configured to extend from a media display and engage with
a retaining
clip (e.g., Fig. 46, 4604).
[0263] Fig. 47 shows an example of a media display 4750 (e.g., Fig. 44, 4405a-
4405d)
having a pin 4752 attached thereto. The media display has an end 4754 (which
may be part
of a media display framing 4756) to which the pin 4752 is attached. The end
4754 is on an
116
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
opposite side of the media display 4750 from the corresponding hinge (e.g.,
Fig. 44, 4425a-
4425d).
[0264] Fig. 48 shows an example of an assembly 4800 comprising the interior
framing
portions 4802, a retaining clip 4804 and one of four media displays 4806
(e.g., Fig. 44,
4405c) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4410), which may
correspond
with a portion of encircled area 4440 in Fig. 44. The interior framing
portions 4802 may
comprise a first arm 4805 and a second arm 4812 that are secured to a joint
bracket 4806.
The joint bracket 4806 may comprise fastener holes (e.g., Fig. 45, 4530) for
securing to the
second arm 4812 with fasteners 4814 via slotted holes 4816. The slotted holes
4816 may
allow for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 4800 and
support panel. The
second arm 4812 may have cutouts 4821a and 4821b adjacent to an end in order
to allow
for tolerances between the various parts of the assembly 4800 and support
panel. The joint
bracket 4806 comprises a stiffening flange 4822 extending to a boss 4824 of
the joint
bracket 4806, enhancing out-of-plane stiffness of the interior framing
portions 4802. The
boss 4824 has a threaded bore (e.g., Fig. 45, 4545), which is configured to
receive a
fastener 4826 extending through a main leg 4830 of the retaining clip 4804 to
secure the
retaining clip 4804 to the boss 4824. The retaining clip 4804 may be shaped as
described in
the example of Fig. 45. A T-leg 4832 couples to ends of adjacent media
displays (one media
display 4806 shown) to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of
the media displays
and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in the same, or
substantially the same,
plane. The T-leg 4832 may be configured to couple to adjacent pins 4836 (one
pin shown),
each secured adjacent to an end 4846 to a respective one of up to four
adjacent media
displays. The T-leg 4832 includes pin retention flanges 4840 that partially
encircle the pins
(one shown) to retain the pins 4836 against the retaining clip 4804, thus
retaining the media
displays against the interior framing portions 4802.
[0265] Fig. 48 shows an example of an assembly 4850 comprising the interior
framing
portions 4852, a retaining clip 4854 and three of four media displays 4856
(e.g., Fig. 44,
4405a, 4405c and 4405d) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44,
4410), which
may correspond with a portion of encircled area 4440 in Fig. 44. The retaining
clip 4854 may
be shaped as described in the example of Fig. 45. A T-leg 4882 couples to ends
of adjacent
media displays (three media displays 4806 shown) to retain, or substantially
retain, relative
positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media
displays in the
same, or substantially the same, plane. The T-leg 4882 may be configured to
couple to
adjacent pins 4886 (coupled to three pins--one pin 4886 shown), each secured
adjacent to
an end 4896 to a respective one of up to four adjacent media displays. The T-
leg 4882
includes pin retention flanges 4890 that partially encircle the pins (one
shown) to retain the
pins 4886 against the retaining clip 4854, thus retaining the media displays
against the
interior framing portions 4852.
117
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
[0266] Fig. 49 shows an example of a portion of interior framing 4900
comprising a first
arm 4902 configured to mount to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460),
which may
correspond with a portion of encircled area 4480 in Fig. 44. The first arm
4902 may be L-
shaped, with a plate 4904 and a flange 4906. The plate 4904 may comprise
fastener holes
4908 for securing a second arm (e.g., Fig. 50, 5012) to the first arm 4902.
The plate 4904
may comprise a boss 4910, which includes a threaded hole 4912 configured to
receive a
fastener (e.g., Fig. 50, 5027) extending from a retaining clip (e.g., Fig. 50,
5029).
[0267] Fig. 49 shows an example of a portion of interior framing 4950
comprising a first
arm 4952 configured to mount to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460),
which may
correspond with a portion of encircled area 4480 in Fig. 44. The first arm
4952 may be L-
shaped, with a plate 4954 and a flange 4956. The plate 4954 may comprise
fastener holes
4958 for securing a second arm (e.g., Fig. 50, 5012) to the first arm 4952.
The plate 4954
may comprise a boss 4960, which includes a threaded hole 4962 configured to
receive a
fastener (e.g., Fig. 50, 5027) extending from a retaining clip (e.g., Fig. 50,
5029).
[0268] Fig. 50 shows an example of an assembly 5000 comprising the interior
framing
portions 5002, a retaining clip 5004 and one of two media displays 5006 (e.g.,
Fig. 44,
4455a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460), which may
correspond
with a portion of encircled area 4490 in Fig. 44. The interior framing
portions 5002 may
comprise a first arm 5005 and a second arm 5012 that are secured together. The
first arm
5005 may comprise fastener holes 5013 for securing to the second arm 5012 with
fasteners
(e.g., Fig. 48, 4814) via slotted holes 5016. The slotted holes 5016 may allow
for tolerances
between the various parts of the assembly 5000 and support panel. The second
arm 5012
may have one or more cutouts 5021 adjacent to an end in order to allow for
tolerances
between the various parts of the assembly 5000 and support panel. The first
arm 5005 may
comprise a boss 5010, which includes a threaded hole (e.g., Fig. 49, 4962)
configured to
receive a fastener 5027 extending through a main leg 5017 of retaining clip
5004 to secure
the retaining clip 5004 to the boss 5010. The retaining clip 5004 may be
configured to retain,
or substantially retain, relative positions of up to two media displays (e.g.,
Fig. 44, 4455a-
4455b). The retaining clip 5004 is generally L-shaped. The generally L-shaped
retaining clip
5005 may include a main leg 5017 that is secured to the supportive panel
(e.g., Fig. 44,
4460) and/or the interior framing portion 5002, and extends outward from the
supportive
panel and/or the interior framing; and an L-leg 5023 extending generally
normal to the main
leg 5017 and configured to be secured to ends of adjacent media displays
(e.g., Fig. 44,
4455a-4455b). The main leg 5017 may include a passage therethrough configured
to
receive a fastener 5027 that releasably secures the retaining clip 5004 to the
supportive
panel and/or the interior framing. The L-leg 5023 couples to ends 5037 of
adjacent media
displays 5006 (one media display shown in Fig. 50) to retain, or substantially
retain, relative
positions of the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media
displays in the
118
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
same, or substantially the same, plane. The L-leg 5023 may be configured to
couple to
adjacent pins 5039 (one pin shown in Fig. 50), each secured to a respective
one of up to two
adjacent media displays. The L-leg 5023 includes a pin retention flange 5041
that partially
encircles the pins to retain the pins against the retaining clip 5004, thus
retaining the media
displays against the interior framing portions 5002.
[0269] Fig. 53A shows an example of an assembly 5300 comprising the interior
framing
portions 5302, a retaining clip 5304 and one of two media displays 5306 (e.g.,
Fig. 44,
4455a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460), which may
correspond
with a portion of encircled area 4490 in Fig. 44. The interior framing
portions 5302 may
comprise a first arm 5305 and a second arm 5312 that are secured together. The
retaining
clip 5304 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative
positions of up to two
media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4455a-4455b). The retaining clip 5304 is
generally L-shaped.
The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5305 may include a main leg 5317 that is
secured to
the supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460) and/or the interior framing portion
5302, and
extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an
L-leg 5323
extending generally normal to the main leg 5317 and configured to be secured
to ends of
adjacent media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4455a-4455b). A first gap 5333 may be
formed
between a plate 5334 of a first arm 5305 of the interior framing portions 5302
and the media
displays 5306 when the media displays 5306 are in the same, or substantially
the same,
plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A second gap 5335
may be formed
between upstanding flanges 5336 of the second arm 5312 and the media displays
5306
when the media displays 5306 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane
and
substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A semi-permeable material
(e.g., as shown and
discussed relative to Figs. 53B and 54A) may be located in the first gap 5333
and/or the
second gap 5335. The L-leg 5323 couples to ends 5337 of adjacent media
displays 5306
(one media display shown in Fig. 53A) to retain, or substantially retain,
relative positions of
the media displays and/or facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays in
the same, or
substantially the same, plane. The L-leg 5323 may be configured to couple to
adjacent pins
5339 (one pin shown in Fig. 53A), each secured to a respective one of up to
two adjacent
media displays.
[0270] Fig. 53B shows an example of an assembly 5350 comprising the interior
framing
portions 5352, a retaining clip 5354 and one of two media displays 5356 (e.g.,
Fig. 44,
4455a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460), which may
correspond
with a portion of encircled area 4490 in Fig. 44. The interior framing
portions 5352 may
comprise a first arm 5355 and a second arm 5362 that are secured together. The
retaining
clip 5354 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative
positions of up to two
media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4455a-4455b). The retaining clip 5354 is
generally L-shaped.
The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5354 may include a main leg 5367 that is
secured to
119
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
the supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460) and/or the interior framing portion
5362, and
extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an
L-leg 5373
extending generally normal to the main leg 5367 and configured to be secured
to ends of
adjacent media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4455a-4455b). A first gap 5383 may be
formed
between a plate 5384 of a first arm 5355 of the interior framing portions 5352
and the media
displays 5356 when the media displays 5356 are in the same, or substantially
the same,
plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A second gap 5385
may be formed
between upstanding flanges 5386 of the second arm 5362 and the media displays
5356
when the media displays 5356 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane
and
substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A semi-permeable material
(e.g., as shown and
discussed relative to Fig. 54A) may be located in the first gap 5383 and/or a
semi-permeable
material 5398 may be disposed in the second gap 5385. The semi-permeable
material 5398
in the second gap 5385 may be a foam (e.g., polyurethane). The semi-permeable
material
5398 may be secured (e.g., with an adhesive) to the second arm 5362. The semi-
permeable
material 5398 may be mounted along a plate 5397, between upstanding flanges
5386, of a
generally C-shaped arm 5362). The semi-permeable material 5398, in an
uncompressed
state, may have a thickness greater than a height of the upstanding flanges
5386 (e.g.,
media displays 5356 may contact the semi-permeable material 5398 with reduced
or no
contact with the C-shaped arm 5362. The semi-permeable material 5398 may be
configured
to reduce (e.g., block) light transmission between the second arm 5362 and the
adjacent
media displays 5356. The semi-permeable material 5398 may allow for
circulation of air
through the semi-permeable material 5398 (e.g., cool the media displays 5356).
The semi-
permeable material 5398 may be configured to compress a predetermined
percentage (e.g.,
about 20% to about 25%, inclusive), which predetermined percentage sets a
planar
alignment of the media displays 5356 to facilitate alignment of adjacent media
displays 5356
in the same, or substantially the same, plane.
[0271] Fig. 54A shows an example of an assembly 5400 comprising the interior
framing
portions 5402, a retaining clip 5404 and one of two media displays 5406 (e.g.,
Fig. 44,
4455a) that are coupled to a supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460), which may
correspond
with a portion of encircled area 4490 in Fig. 44. The interior framing
portions 5402 may
comprise a first arm 5405 and a second arm 5412 that are secured together. The
retaining
clip 5404 may be configured to retain, or substantially retain, relative
positions of up to two
media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4455a-4455b). The retaining clip 5404 is
generally L-shaped.
The generally L-shaped retaining clip 5404 may include a main leg 5417 that is
secured to
the supportive panel (e.g., Fig. 44, 4460) and/or the interior framing portion
5412, and
extends outward from the supportive panel and/or the interior framing; and an
L-leg 5423
extending generally normal to the main leg 5417 and configured to be secured
to ends of
adjacent media displays (e.g., Fig. 44, 4455a-4455b). A first gap 5433 may be
formed
120
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
between a plate 5334 of a first arm 5405 of the interior framing portions 5402
and the media
displays 5406 when the media displays 5406 are in the same, or substantially
the same,
plane and substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A second gap 5435
may be formed
between upstanding flanges 5436 of the second arm 5412 and the media displays
5406
when the media displays 5406 are in the same, or substantially the same, plane
and
substantially parallel to the supportive panel. A semi-permeable material 5448
may be
located in the first gap 5433 and/or a semi-permeable material (e.g., 5398, as
shown and
discussed relative to Fig. 53B) may be disposed in the second gap 5435. The
semi-
permeable material 5448 in the first gap 5433 may be a foam (e.g.,
polyurethane). The semi-
permeable material 5448 may be secured (e.g., with an adhesive) to the first
arm 5405. The
semi-permeable material 5448 may be mounted along a plate of a generally L-
shaped arm
5405. The semi-permeable material 5448 may be configured to reduce (e.g.,
block) light
transmission between the first arm 5405 and the adjacent media displays 5406.
The semi-
permeable material 5448 may allow for circulation of air through the semi-
permeable
material 5448 (e.g., cool the media displays 5406). The semi-permeable
material 5448 may
be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., about 20% to about
25%,
inclusive), which predetermined percentage sets a planar alignment of the
media displays
5406 to facilitate alignment of adjacent media displays 5406 in the same, or
substantially the
same, plane.
[0272] Fig. 54B shows an example of an assembly 5450 comprising framing 5452
(e.g., a
transom or a mullion) of a supportive panel (e.g., a window) and a media
display 5456. A
semi-permeable material 5460 is disposed in a gap between the framing 5452 and
the
media display 5456. The semi-permeable material 5460 in the gap may be a foam
(e.g.,
polyurethane). The semi-permeable material 5460 may be secured (e.g., with an
adhesive)
to the framing 5254. The semi-permeable material 5460 may be configured to
reduce (e.g.,
block) light transmission between the framing 5254 and the adjacent media
display 5456.
The semi-permeable material 5460 may allow for circulation of air through the
semi-
permeable material 5460 (e.g., cool the media display 5456). The semi-
permeable material
5460 may be configured to compress a predetermined percentage (e.g., about 20%
to about
25%, inclusive), which predetermined percentage sets a planar alignment of the
media
display 5456 with other media displays in a display matrix to facilitate
alignment of adjacent
media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane.
[0273] In some embodiments, media displays forming a matrix of displays may be
mounted adjacent to a supportive panel. The supportive panel may be a window.
The
window may be any window disclosed herein. The supportive panel may be a
tintable
window. The supportive panel may include framing. The framing may surround a
portion or
all of the supportive panel. The media displays may be immediately adjacent to
each other.
The media displays may be displaceable (e.g., movable) relative to the support
panel. The
121
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
media displays may swivel (e.g., pivot) relative to the support panel. Each of
the hinges may
be secured between framing of the supportive panel and a framing of respective
media
display. The media displays may be swivelable into a position where the media
displays are
aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane. A retaining clip may be
removably
mountable to the media displays. The retaining clip may facilitate maintaining
alignment of
the media displays in the same, or substantially the same, plane. The
retaining clip may
retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays
during engagement of
the retaining clip with the media displays. The retaining clip may be disposed
adjacent to
ends of the media displays opposite from ends of the media displays that are
coupled to
hinges. The retaining clip may be disposed adjacent to an end of a first media
display that is
disposed immediately adjacent to an end of a second media display. Interior
framing
portions may be configured to be secured to a supportive panel and be
removably coupled
to a retaining clip. Interior framing portions may comprise one or more
framing members.
Interior framing portions may be configured to extend across a supportive
panel and/or along
an edge of a supportive panel. Interior framing portions may include a first
arm extending
between or along framing of the supportive panel. Interior framing portions
may include a
second arm, which may be generally normal to a first arm. The second arm may
extend
between or along framing of the supportive panel. The interior framing
portions may include
a member for releasably securing a retaining clip to the interior framing
portions.
[0274] In some embodiments, a framing system, which may comprise framing
supporting
a supportive panel and interior framing portions, may be mounted adjacent to a
supportive
panel. Mounting pins may be installed to media displays. Pivotal supports
(e.g., hinges) may
be mounted to media displays and to a framing system adjacent to a supportive
panel.
Media displays may be adjacent to each other. Media displays may be pivotable
about
respective pivotal supports relative to a supportive panel. Media displays may
be pivoted
toward a supportive panel such that adjacent media displays are aligned in the
same, or
substantially the same, plane. A retaining clip may be installed that is
configured to engage
the media displays on ends opposite from respective pivotal supports to
retain, or
substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during
engagement of the
retaining clip with the media displays. In some embodiments, a retaining clip
may be
removed and media displays may be pivoted away from a supportive panel. Media
displays
and/or a supportive panel may be serviced while one or more media displays are
pivoted
away from the supportive panel. The servicing may include repairing, replacing
and/or
cleaning the supportive panel. The supportive panel may be a window. The
supportive panel
may be tintable window. The servicing may include replacement, repair and/or
cleaning of
electrical components and/or communication components associated with the
window. The
framing system may be framing of a window. The framing of the window may
include
transoms and/or mullions. The servicing may include repairing, replacing
and/or cleaning
122
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
one or more of the media panels. After servicing a supportive panel, one or
more of the
media displays or both the supportive panel and one or more of the media
displays, the
media displays may be pivoted toward the supportive panel such that adjacent
media
displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the same, plane. A
retaining clip may be
installed that is configured to engage the media displays on ends opposite
from respective
pivotal supports to retain, or substantially retain, relative positions of the
media displays
during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays.
[0275] Fig. 51 shows an example of installation and alignment of media
displays. A
framing system, which may comprise framing supporting a supportive panel and
interior
framing portions, is mounted adjacent to a supportive panel, 5101. Mounting
pins are
installed to media displays, 5102. Pivotal supports (e.g., hinges) are mounted
to media
displays and to a framing system adjacent to a supportive panel, 5103. Media
displays are
pivotable about respective pivotal supports relative to a supportive panel.
Media displays are
pivoted toward a supportive panel such that adjacent media displays are
aligned in the
same, or substantially the same, plane, 5104. A retaining clip is installed
that is configured to
engage the media displays on ends opposite from respective pivotal supports to
retain, or
substantially retain, relative positions of the media displays during
engagement of the
retaining clip with the media displays, 5105.
[0276] Fig. 52 shows an example of servicing of media displays, support panels
or both. A
retaining clip is removed, 5201, and media displays are pivoted away from a
supportive
panel, 5202. Media displays and/or a supportive panel may be serviced, 5203,
while one or
more media displays are pivoted away from the supportive panel. The servicing
may include
repairing, replacing and/or cleaning the supportive panel. The servicing may
include
repairing, replacing and/or cleaning one or more of the media panels. After
servicing a
supportive panel, one or more of the media displays or both the supportive
panel and one or
more of the media displays, the media displays are pivoted toward the
supportive panel such
that adjacent media displays are aligned in the same, or substantially the
same, plane, 5204.
A retaining clip is installed that engages the media displays on ends opposite
from
respective pivotal supports to retain, or substantially retain, relative
positions of the media
displays during engagement of the retaining clip with the media displays,
5205.
[0277]
In some instances, the display construct laminate may break over time,
e.g., due to
imperfections in its lamination (e.g., see figs. 2 and 8). For example, when
the binder (e.g., a
laminate and/or adhesive such as 806 and/or 808) does not extend to the glass
portion (e.g.,
804 and/or 808) of the display construct. Such absence of laminate may exert
pressure on
the glass upon installation, assembly (e.g., framing), and/or use, and causes
it to crack or
break. In some embodiment, a seal is added to one or more sides of the display
construct,
e.g., to alleviate compromised lamination. The seal may comprise a polymer
(e.g.,
comprising organic or silicone based polymer). The seal may comprise a
stiffening gel. The
123
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
seal may comprise a high modulus Silicone such as room-temperature-vulcanizing
silicone
(RTV silicone). The seal may strengthen the laminate of the display construct.
For example,
the seal may strengthen one or more edges of the display construct, e.g., to
prevent cracks
from forming and/or breakage from occurring. The seal may comprise a solid, or
semisolid
(e.g., gel) material. The sealing material may be applied to one or more edges
and/or sides
of the display construct as a liquid or as a gel, and allowed to cure to
stiffen (e.g.,
polymerize), e.g., to form a stiffer and/or stronger (e.g., solid) material as
compared to the
material at its applied state. Curing may be at room temperature (e.g., about
from about
20 C to about 25 C), or at a temperature higher than room temperature. curing
may require
electromagnetic activation (e.g., using ultraviolet light). The seal may
comprise polyurethane,
polyester, epoxy, or rubber. The seal may have a harness from about 15 shore
to about 40
Shore A. The seal may comprise a gasket. The seal may be molded to one or more
sides of
the display construct in situ. The seal may applied to the display construct
before the display
construct is coupled to the hinge. The seal may applied to the display
construct before the
display construct is installed in the framing. The seal may applied to the
display construct
after the display construct is coupled to the hinge. The seal may applied to
the display
construct after the display construct is installed in the framing. The seal
may comprise one or
more filler materials (e.g., acetic acid). The seal may be generated by
reacting dimethyl
dichloro-silane with water (e.g., using a platinum or tin catalyst). The seal
may be have a
high-temperature resistance such as up to at least about 100 C, 150 C or 205
C, 400 F.
[0278] Fig. 55A shows an example of a display construct disposed in a framing
5512 and
coupled to a hinge 5511. The display construct comprises a laminate having a
first glass
portion 5504 and a second glass portion 5505, laminated with a binder that
does not extend
to the ends of glass portions 5504 and 5505, thus subjecting the display
construct (e.g.,
glass portion(s) thereof) to potential breakage and/or cracking over time such
as upon
installation, assembly, and/or use. The hinge portion 5511 comprises a fan
5501 and a
circuit board 5503. The display construct is coupled to a touch screen
functionality 5502.
[0279] Fig. 55B shows an example of a display construct disposed in a framing
5562 and
coupled to a hinge 5561. The display construct comprises a laminate having a
first glass
portion 5554 and a second glass portion 5555, laminated with a binder (not
shown) that does
not extend to the ends of glass portions 5554 and 5555, which display
construct edge is
strengthened by a sealing material (e.g., a seal) 5560, e.g., in areas of the
display construct
to which the binder does not extend to. The hinge portion 5561 comprises a fan
5551 and a
circuit board 5553. The display construct is coupled to a touch screen
functionality 5552.
[0280] While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been shown,
and
described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such
embodiments are
provided by way of example only. It is not intended that the invention be
limited by the
specific examples provided within the specification. While the invention has
been described
124
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
WO 2022/072462
PCT/US2021/052597
with reference to the afore-mentioned specification, the descriptions and
illustrations of the
embodiments herein are not meant to be construed in a limiting sense. Numerous
variations,
changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilled in the art without
departing from
the invention. Furthermore, it shall be understood that all aspects of the
invention are not
limited to the specific depictions, configurations, or relative proportions
set forth herein which
depend upon a variety of conditions and variables. It should be understood
that various
alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein might be
employed in
practicing the invention. It is therefore contemplated that the invention
shall also cover any
such alternatives, modifications, variations, or equivalents. It is intended
that the following
claims define the scope of the invention and that methods and structures
within the scope of
these claims and their equivalents be covered thereby.
125
CA 03171898 2022- 9- 15
